1662_22_OH_Ed01

Operator’ s HandbookAlcatel 1662SMC STM4/16 Compact Multiservice Node 1662SMC Rel.2.2 3AL 98168 AD AA Ed.01 RELATED TECHNICAL HANDBOOK: HANDBOOK 1662SMC Rel. 2.2 Technical Handbook ANV Part No. 3AL 98 168 AAAA SAFETY RULES Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the Safety Rules described in Technical Handbook’ s section HANDBOOK GUIDE. HANDBOOK COMPOSITION (present edition) part No pages Numbered From 1/15 1/15 1/399 1/ 46 1/16 to 15/15 15/15 399/399 46/46 16/16 1 2 3 4 5 HANDBOOK GUIDE INTRODUCTION NE MANAGEMENT NE MAINTENANCE SIBDL 15 15 399 46 16 3AL 98168 AD AA Ed.01 Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.2 Operator Handbook All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.2 Handbook Guide 01 ED 2004-12-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 1/16 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 1.1 1.2 1.3 General information· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 Handbook applicability· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 Purpose of the handbook · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 1.4 Handbook configuration check· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 2 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 3.1 3.2 First aid for electric shock· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 Norms and labels· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 3 4 5 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 5.1 5.2 5.3 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Handbook supply to Customers· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Aims of standard Customer Documentation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 5.4 Handbook Updating · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13 5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) · · · · · · · · 13 5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13 5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14 5.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14 5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14 5.5.2 Use of the CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14 5.5.3 CD-ROM identification · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15 5.5.4 CD-ROM updating · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15 ED 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 2/16 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information WARNING ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. NOTICE The product specification and/or performance le vels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent. 1.2 Handbook applicability All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 1662SMC ANV P/N 3AL 98001 AAAA FACTORY P/N -- PRODUCT 1662SMC RELEASE Rel.2.2 VERSION(N.B.) -- ANV P/N 3AL 98002 AEAA FACTORY P/N -- For further information on the Alcatel software product and its physical distribution support refer to the “ Introduction”section. N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’ s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software “ version”distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the productrelease’ s“ version”marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged. 1.3 Purpose of the handbook ED 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 3/16 This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook (see Table 1.) and the 1320CT associated documentation (see Table 5.) does not replicate information contained into it. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook. When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know: • The structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (product-release) this handbook refers to. • How to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications 1.4 Handbook configuration check All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) that can have editions different from one another. The Edition of the whole handbook is that of section 1 (HANDBOOK GUIDE). The edition of the enclosed documents indicated in the following table is that of the corresponding original internal document. HANDBOOK EDITION REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE HANDBOOK GUIDE INTRODUCTION MANUAL NE MANAGEMENT MANUAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL SIBDL MANUAL 01 0 0 4 5 SECTION EDITION 01 01 01 01 01 02 03 1 2 3 4 5 1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 issued on Dec 2004 is the first released and validated version of the handbook. ED 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 4/16 2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this Handbook. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 consists of the following handbooks: Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware REF [1] All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. HANDBOOK 1662SMC Rel.2.2 Technical Handbook ANV Part No. 3AL 98168 AAAA FACTORY Part No. THIS HDBK Provide information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance , Hardware setting documentation [2] 1662SMC Rel.2.2 Installation Handbook 1662SMC Rel.2.2 Turnup & Commissionig Handbook 3AL 98168 ABAA Provide information regarding Equipment Installation [3] 3AL 98168 ACAA Provide information regarding Equipment Turn-On, Test and Operation Table 2.Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control REF [4] HANDBOOK 1662SMC Rel.2.2 CT Operator’ s Handbook ANV Part No. 3AL 98168 ADAA FACTORY Part No. -- THIS HDBK Or note Provides 1662SMC “ SDH”Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW REF [5] [6] HANDBOOK ATM Rel.1.0 Operator’ s Handbook ATM Rel.1.2 Operator’ s Handbook 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide ANV Part No. 3AL 80730 AAAA 3AL 80814 AAAA FACTORY Part No. 957.140.552 J 957.140.652 W THIS HDBK Or note ED 3AL 98168 ADAA 5/16 Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures Table 4. Handbooks related to IP specific product SW REF [7] All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. HANDBOOK ANV Part No. IP Rel.1.0 3AL 81062 AAAA Operator’ s Handbook Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures FACTORY Part No. 957.140.722 L THIS HDBK Or note Table 5. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform REF [8] HANDBOOK 1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook ANV Part No. 3AL 79186 AAAA FACTORY Part No. 957.130.542 E THIS HDBK [9] Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operator’ s 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 Handbook A Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Information about Historical Alarms and Network Element Symbols Management (Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are only used by Network Management. ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’ s 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 Handbook E Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package. [10] Table 6. Documentation on CD-ROM REF CD-ROM TITLE [11] 1662SMC Rel.2.2 CD-ROMDOC EN ANV Part No. 3AL 98170AAAA FACTORY Part No. Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to [4] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks [12] 1320CT BASIC CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 79549 AAAA 417.100.031 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [8] to [10] ED 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 6/16 [13] [14] [15] ATM Rel.1.1 CD-ROM DOC 3AL80739 AAAA 417.100.060 EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [5] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks ATM 1.2 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 80815 AAAA 417.100.068 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [6] IP 1.0 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 81063 AAAA 417.100.084 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [7] All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Table 7. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM REF [16] HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 955.100.692 N THIS HDBK [17] S9-16xxSM 3AL 78901 AAAA System Installation Handbook Provides general installation rules necessary to ins tall the Optinex family equipment in the S9 Rack. Optinex RACK-16xxSM 3AL 38207 AAAA 955.110.202 System Installation L Handbook Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the Optinex Rack. Handbooks REF. [16] and [17] are available only on paper support N.B. ED 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 7/16 3. It can also be employed while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD) . Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. other than ALCATEL’ s. • Apply dry gauze on the burns.COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. ED 01 SC.1 First aid for electric shock Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY .EQUIPMENT LABELS Identical or similar information on Personal Computer.SAFETY RULES • General rules • Harmful optical signals • Risk of explosion • Moving mechanical parts • Heat-radiating Mechanical Parts .2 Norms and labels Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’ s designed and manufactured equipment to obtain the following information: . • Do not apply ointments or other oily substances. WARNING: • Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts. Work-Station etc. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth-to-mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately. loaded with software applicative described in this Handbook.. Passing on and copying of this document. If that is not possible. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor. TREATMENT OF BURNS This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness.3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 3.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 8/16 . . is supplied in the Constructor’ s technical documentation. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. . . This chapter lists the handbooks the Operator should have in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the specific productrelease this handbook refers to. .Chapter 1: Introductio n. This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. The Network Element Manual includes the following chapters: . SECTION 3: NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGEMENT Manual The aim of this document is to describe the Craft Terminal view.Chapter 3: NE management supervision.4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION This handbook is composed of the following Manuals: SECTION 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE (This document) The Handbook Guide gives general information on the application and use of the Handbook. Alarm Configuration etc). In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (CT access. . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. inserting operative information. Definitions concerning the acronyms. The Craft Terminal is introduced and the software product listed.Chapter 2: Product-release handbooks. The view organization is presented and the menus available listed and briefly described. . In this chapter configuration referred to the Security management are described (ACD level and Manager list). Passing on and copying of this document.Chapter 4: Glossary of term s. The Introduction Manual includes the following chapters: . . The acronyms used in all the operator manuals are listed. This chapter gives the structure of this manual.Chapter 2: General introduction on views and menus. . .Chapter 5: Security Management.Chapter 1:Handbook structure and configuration check.Chapter 1: Introductio n.Chapter 3: Acronyms and abbreviations. The Handbook Guide includes the following chapters: All rights reserved.Chapter 5: General on Alcatel Customer Documentation SECTION 2: INTRODUCTION Manual The Introduction Manual describes the main features of the graphical interface and provides a general overview of the system architecture and the different functionalities provided by the Craft Terminal. composition and evolution. . .Chapter 4: Handbook description . NE Time.Chapter 4: NE management general configuration.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 9/16 .Chapter 2: General description of the Craft Terminal. This chapter gives information on the whole handbook application.Chapter 3: Safety norms and labels . The Craft Terminal main functionality in the NE management (EML-USM) are listed and briefly described. SECTION 4: NETWORK ELEMENT MAINTENANCE Manual This document aims at introducing the Maintenance procedure. . setting the relevant configuration.Chapter 7: Diagnosis management. This chapter permits to manage the MSP protection. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. This chapter deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present o n the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 10/16 . Passing on and copying of this document. .Chapter 14: Transmission view.Chapter 1: Introductio n. to access the port and to change the physical interface. This chapter permits to update the NE by means download procedure and to manage NE software. . access to the Event and Alarm Log file and Internal Link Monitor.Chapter 10: Board view. . abnormal condition list (as result of operator’ s command).Chapter 8: Communication and Routing management. This chapter permits to manage the EPS protection.Chapter 6: External input and output points management. the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network . List the maintenance steps.Chapter 3: Maintenance of the Personal Compute r.Chapter 19: ISA Port Configuration. All rights reserved. .Chapter 17: Performance Monitoring management. . This chapter permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol). ED 01 SC. This chapter permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. This chapter permits to manage the Overhead. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the va rious port.Chapter 15: Cross connection management. This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). In this chapter are specified: access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition. . This chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM boards creation and the ATM/IP/ETH TTPs creation.Chapter 18: Synchronization management. . This chapter permits to manage the connection of the paths. concerning the OSI and IP communication protocols for the local NE. In this chapter are presented the communication and routing parameters.Chapter 9: Equipment management. . This chapter permits to set and show the transmission resources referred to the Port.Chapter 16: Overhead management.Chapter 12: Equipment protection management. . . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. setting the relevant configuration.Chapter 20: Software management. inserting information useful to identify alarms and troubleshoot the NE.Chapter 13: Multiplex Section protection management. This chapter permits to set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. The Maintenance Manual includes the following chapters: .Chapter 2: Maintenance introduction. .. . . This chapter permits to set and show Synchronization parameters and status. The Personal Computer manual is referred.Chapter 11: Port view. . Passing on and copying of this document.Chapter 7: Upgrading with New Hardware. The FLASH card substitution procedure is detailed.Chapter 8: FLASH card substitutio n.Chapter 3: Configuration for SIBDL ED 01 SC. .Chapter 5: Troubleshooting (Corrective Maintenance)..Chapter 2: Download with SIBDL configuration . .1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98168 ADAA 11/16 .Chapter 6: Unit replacement with spare. Detection location and correction of failure are presented.Chapter 1: Introduction . Shut Cdown and restart of the PC is indicated. . All rights reserved. The Hardware upgrading procedure is detailed. .Chapter 4: Problems with Craft terminal. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The SIBDL Manual includes the following chapters: . SECTION 5: SIBDL Manual This document describes the download procedure with SIBDL. The replacement procedure is detailed. . 2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 1/15 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Introduction 01 ED 2004-12-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC.2 Operator Handbook All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. 3.....................13 Synchronization management..................................................7 2................ 10 GLOSSARY OF TERMS..........4 1................................................................1...15 Software management..3.........................7 2.................2 Software products and licences list and part numbers........................ GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL.............9 2.....................................4 1............3 Security Management............................... 12 ED 01 SC........3....................................8 2.................................................6 2......................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.............7 2..............................................................................2.....................2 ALCATEL SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND LICENCE DELIVERED TO THE CUSTOMER .....1 Document scope...........................................................................................................................................................................6 Communication and routing management .............................7 2.....................................3......3.....................................3...........................9 2.........4 1....................1 SCOPE ................8 2.3............................................................................................................................................................................................3 1 INTRODUCTION ....................................8 Port management...............................................7 Equipment and board management............................3.............................2 READING RULES ..............3.................................................4 1...............................................9 3 4 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS..............3.............3 CRAFT TERMINAL MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES IN THE NE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................................................2 Network Element general configuration..............................9 2.........................................................5 Diagnosis management.............8 2....4 1.........................9 2.5 2...........4 2 All rights reserved................................2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 2/15 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................9 2.............................................................................4 External input and output point management........3..3.......3..12 Performance monitoring management....................1..7 2.9 Protection management............5 2............................3.........3................................................ Passing on and copying of this document......LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .................1 Menu options...............2 Target audience.........1 Network Element management supervision............7 2...14 ISA Port Configuration .........................10 Transmission management.......2...........................8 2..................................................................................................1 Software product and licences description.....5 2..1 INTRODUCTION .................11 Cross Connection management..........................................................................5 2...........2................................................................................................ .....6 Table 2 ............................... ED 01 SC....LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES TABLES Table 1 .............................2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 3/15 .............. Software licence part numbers ...6 All rights reserved................ Software products part numbers ..................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.... Passing on and copying of this document..................... 2 Reading rules 1.1 Scope 1. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: – 1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook 1.2 Target audience The Introduction Manual is intended for all users. the information is surely given in another manual. but not necessarily all the options of these menus. When a menu option is not detailed in a manual. 1. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Menu options All the manuals describe menus.1.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 4/15 .2.1 INTRODUCTION 1. All rights reserved.1 Document scope The Introduction Manual presents the Craft Terminal main functions and provides a general overview of the different functionalities provided by the ELM–USM of the Craft Terminal for Info Model NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.1. 2. navigation.1 Introduction The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 5/15 . which the operator has to read before this Handbook.2. The Craft Terminal characteristic (computer configuration) are listed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook. which directly permit to manage the Network Element. etc. the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as “ Installation”and common screens as “ Network Element Synthesis view” . Multiple NE management up to 32 Network elements is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal application. Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EML–USM views. This application is in charge of the ATM and IP management inside the NE such as ATM/IP cross–connection. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This Operator’ s Handbook deals with the EML–USM views of the Craft Terminal. The management main functions of the EML–USM are inserted at para. providing ITU– compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element. From the Craft Terminal is possible to run another Specific Software application. A detailed description of the EML–USM screens is given in Section Ne Management of this handbook.2.3. The list and part numbers of the SDH software products distributed by Alcatel is inserted in para. Passing on and copying of this document.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL 2. 2. Further. rules. The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application. common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal. In the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook are described all the general description of use. Details information about Specific Application are described in the relevant Operator’ s Handbook (see Section 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE for the code).1 Software product and licences description The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CD–ROM. Backup and Restore configuration files etc. The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook. ED 01 SC.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer 2. 2. listed on the following table. 2.B.2 LICENCE FEE SWL–LCT 1662SM–C Rel. 2. 2. Table 1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. listed on the following table. thus following product evolution. The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on the NE.2 LICENCE FEE SWL–B 1662SM–C Rel.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 6/15 . Software licence part numbers Name SWL–A 1662SM–C Rel. Table 2.B. 1 1 1 2 2 N.B. Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number. 2 . 2. All rights reserved.In this CD–ROM are contained: Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal Software package of the NE.2 LICENCE FEE SWL–C 1662SM–C Rel.2 LICENCE FEE ANV Part Number 3AL 98166 AAAA 3AL 98166 ABAA 3AL 98166 ACAA 3AL 98167 AAAA 3AL 98167 ABAA FACTORY Part Number N.2 LICENCE FEE SWL–RCT 1662SM–C Rel. Software products part numbers Name SWP 1662SM–C R 2.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number.2 CD–ROM ANV Part Number 3AL 98169 AAAA FACTORY Part Number N. to realize all the functions of the NES and EML–USM).2. 1 License alternative for Network Element software features: SWL–A: Full functionality set SWL–B: Improved functionality set SWL–C: Basic functionality set ED 01 SC. 2. to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download function) The software package used for management permits the dialogue between craft terminal and NE. Alcatel typically offers several software licenses on the software product (only one for this equipment) They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software features. Passing on and copying of this document. referred to the Network Element management views. In this chapter. 2 License alternative for Craft Terminal software features: SWL–LCT: Local Craft Terminal functionality SWL–RCT: Remote Craft Terminal functionality 2.N.3. – Restart NE 2.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 7/15 . obtained by means EML–USM. Passing on and copying of this document. 2.3.B. – Display External points – Configure External points 2.3.3.2 Network Element general configuration Deals with the general configuration of the equipment. – Set Manager list – Set ACD level 2.3 Security Management Deals with the security configuration of the equipment. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 2. – Alarm re–synchronization. Alarms information are detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual – Abnormal Condition list ( as result of operator’ s commands) – Event log Manager Permits to have access to the Event Log file. – Craft Terminal access state (allow or inhibit) – NE Time management – Alarms Configuration – Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management. – Remote Inventory (” upload”and “ view”remote inventory) – Internal Link Monitor ED 01 SC.3.4 External input and output point management Deals with housekeeping signals input from the external (station alarms) or forwarded (output) towards the external. – Allow/Inhibit alarm notification. are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management All rights reserved. The functionalities constitute the heading of each of the paragraphs below.5 Diagnosis management For real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization and correction.1 Network Element management supervision Deals with the NE state and access. – Alarm Surveillance The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the views concerning the entity. VC4). It is used to check the detailed alarm of each TP and to configure them (many options are the same of the Transmission view). – Details of alarm and state condition – TP role.2.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 8/15 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.7 Equipment and board management Deals with the presentation of the equipment and the hierarchical tree structure.3. Ethernet. Different types of protection can be managed: – Local NE and OS addresses – NTP configurations – LAPD. PDH. PPI.6 Communication and routing management This deals with the configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE. connection. MESA.8 Port management This permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred only to the port (SDH.e. information 2.3. permitting to define the types of boards p resent.9 Protection management This deals with the protection mechanism that is possible to configure in the NE. Passing on and copying of this document. etc.3. Different types of protection can be managed: – Equipment protection switching – Multiple Section Protection ED 01 SC. For each port a specific menu is available where various configuration of the specific port can be set. The Board view permits to access the Port view. the OS and each other related NE. for example: – Automatic Laser Shutdown – MSP protection – Loopback management and configuration – Single fiber configuration – TP Frame Mode Configuration – Retiming – Ethernet Port Configuration Port view is also the entry point of other “ management functions” : – Performance Monitoring management – Cross Connection management For each port are presented: – The various ITU–T functional blocks (i.3. RAP configurations – IP Configuration – Tunneling Configuration All rights reserved. 2. – Remote Inventory 2. – Set / modify / remove boards or subrack – Software information of the selected board. HOA ATM and IP). RST. thus following product evolution.e. SSU. Similar operation are made on the Overhead cross connections. – Create / modify cross connections – Activate / deactivate / switch cross connections 2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3. or as a consequence of substitution with a spare. – Set up the Performance Monitoring thresholds – Collect and display Performance Monitoring data – Performance monitoring history 2. information For each port a specific menu is available similar to the Port view where various configuration of the specific port can be set.3. T5 and T6 configuration – Protection commands 2.10 Transmission management This permits to cover the management of the transmission resources. PPI.3.3.3. permitting to charge the software in the relevant NE to upgrade the NE software.13 Synchronization management Deals with the management of the timing.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 9/15 . In this way the multiplex structures are created. T4.11 Cross Connection management This deals with the connection of all the Termination Point (TP). RST.15 Software management Deals with the manipulation of the software package within NE.14 ISA Port Configuration Describes the operations necessary for the ISA boards and the ISA TPs creation. 2. It supplies an overview of the complete signal flo w. – Timing source. VC4). 2. For all the ports are presented: – The various ITU–T functional blocks (i. opening the views of all the specific ports of the NE (SDH and PDH). ED 01 SC.826. log and display performance data associated with the managed NE according ITU–T G.12 Performance monitoring management This function deals with the set up. etc.It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Netwo rk. which are the starting and terminating points of a transmission segment. – Back–up and restore on the MIB of the NE. managing the traffic flow.3. – Software download refers to the NE software. T0. 2. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. connection. – Synthesis of alarm and state condition – TP role. collect. Also Transmission view is than the entry point of other “ management functions”. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. CD–ROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee CT: Craft Terminal DCN: Data Communications Network ECC: Embedded Communication Channels EML: Element Management Layer EPS: Equipment Protection Switching FAD: Functional Access Domain Gbit/s: Gigabits per second GNE: Gateway Network Element HMI: Human Machine Interface IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IM: Information Manager Kbit/s: Kilobits per second LAN: Local Area Network LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container MAC: Media Access Control Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds MIB: Management Information Base MS: Multiplex Section ED 01 SC.3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AIS: Alarm Indication Signal APS: Automatic Protection Switching ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Module All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 10/15 . Passing on and copying of this document. NTP: Network Time Protocol OS: Operation System PI: Physical Interface SD: Signal Degrade SF: Signal Failure TMN: Telecommunications Management Network TN: Telecommunications Network TP: Termination Point USM: User Service Manager XC: Cross– Connection ED 01 SC.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 11/15 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.MSP: Multiplex Section Protection NAD: Network Access Domain NAP: Network Access Point NE: Network Element NML: Network Management Layer All rights reserved. 2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 12/15 All rights reserved. Alarm Status: Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm. Alarm: An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state of an equipment or the CT. Passing on and copying of this document. Cross–connection Cross–Connections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS Acknowledgment: When an alarm is taken into account by the application. Is useful for stocking data due to its available memory space. Board: A board is part of an NE. . Digital Communication network: Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format. It can be used to configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. the operator has to acknowledge it to point out that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. Embedded Communication Channel: Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant SDH networks. During alarm configuration it is possible to set a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. Administrator: A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Compact Disk Read Only Memory: Data saving support from which the information can only be read. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end. Craft Terminal: Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. Alarm Severity Assignment Profile: Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes. ED 01 SC. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear has to be acknowledged. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE. this is the possibility of routing one signal to a particular destination. Element Management Layer: This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements. Now called the ITU–T (International Telecommunication Union). of those NEs providing a QECC* interface.Equipment Protection Switching: Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee: Standard organization for telecommunications. or on the network itself. History Report: This function enables operators to get information concerning performances. Kilobits per second: Unit that correspond to the transmission of 10 3 bits every second. They can be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied to them. The operator specifies the time period for which he requires the report. All rights reserved. all its records are deleted. from the OS. Gigabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 9 bits every second. Gateway Network Element: It is a Network Element devoted to the control. Filter: They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself.QECC*. They can undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signa l to two different transmission media) or multiplexing/demultiplexing functions. Management Domain: ED 01 SC. security or alarms on entities composing the network. To do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* . Logs: Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications. operator commands and system alarms. it is used to transmit or receive signals. Passing on and copying of this document. When a log is flushed. Line Terminal: A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. Functional Access Domain: It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user. Flushing: This deals with logs. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 13/15 . The size of the log can be configured. Human Machine Interface: It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system. ED 01 SC. Media Access Control Address: Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks. Each management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs. Operator: The end–user of the Craft Terminal. All rights reserved. signal loss monitoring and loopback functions. The 1353SH is an Operation System. Operation System: A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way. Multiplex Section: In general. it offers to the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. Physical Interface: Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouples the line signals and adapt the form of signal for further transmission. Multiplexer: Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate and to decompose it back to the smaller rate signals. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile. using protocols and interfaces. Network Management Level: Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network. Port: A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. Passing on and copying of this document.The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 14/15 . This functional block also manages clock extraction. represents the section containing the multiplexed signals. Network Access Domain: Defined as a set of Network Elements. Megabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 6 bits every second. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Notification: Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user can manage. Network Element: Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Have characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations. Repeater: Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance.A port is either a termination point or an origination point. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality.2:Introduction 3AL 98168 ADAA 15/15 . A finite number of predefined user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. Telecommunication Network: Describes the network to be managed. END OF DOCUMENT ED 01 SC. Wrapping: Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file is full. Thresholding: This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that. User Profile: Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. Passing on and copying of this document. Severity: Linked to alarms. They provide an organized network structure to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the information. Telecommunication Management Network: Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. Provides the transmission. Terminal Point: Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. the transport and the switching supports to the interconnected Network Elements. generate trouble indications. Is related to a port. All rights reserved. the administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles installed with Craft Terminal. when exceeded. severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure. User Service Manager: These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface and facilitate the interaction with the product. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Operator Handbook All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 1/399 .Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.2 NE Management 01 2004-12-21 Creation Ma Jing ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. Passing on and copying of this document. ...........................................17 2................21 2..............3............................................39 4................................................................................................24 2...............................1 ACCESS STATE (ALLOW OR INHIBIT NE C RAFT ACCESS)....48 4............ Passing on and copying of this document...................1 Procedure to modify an ASAP ........27 2..............1 EML--USM VIEW ORGANIZATION ................... 8 1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................52 5...............1...................................................................................................6 Alarms persistency Configuration...3 ALARM CONFIGURATION .................................24 2................16 All rights reserved...................6 Download menu introduction.....................................................1 Acronyms and abbreviations.........................................................................................................................2..................................................................42 4..................................3 Diagnosis menu introduction......37 NE SUPERVISION AND LOGIN .....................................................................2.................................................42 4....... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..........................18 2......................................2...............3.....52 6 ED EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT .............2...............................................................2 NE MANAGEMENT STATES ..............................................................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 2/399 .16 1.....25 2........................................................25 2......................................8 Board menu introduction....................40 4................5 Alarms re— synchronization..........................17 2..3 ADVICES ON NAVIGATION PRINCIPLES..................................................13 External Points menu introduction...........3..........................2 SET MANAGER LIST...................................50 4...............2 INTRODUCTION ON THE EML--USM MENU OPTIONS ........................51 5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT ................................................3....................2.................................2...................3........................16 1....37 4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION .........................2 Glossary of terms ................................................................12 Synchronization menu introduction .......................1.........................................................................................2 Target audience..............................................2 NE T IME MANAGEMENT ...........................................24 2..................1 3.......................27 2.........30 2...2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP).......1 5........................................................................LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES ............16 1.....................................................................4 RESTART NE.........................................................................................................................4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications.................34 3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION ........................2......................................................................................10 EPS menu introduction.......................................29 2....................9 Port menu introduction ...................................................................49 4................................................................ 2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS..........................................16 1........................39 4.................................23 2......1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state ............................................................................22 2.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities.3....................1..16 1.............................................37 3.................................................2...11 Transmission menu introduction.................................................................50 4.......1 Document scope..........................40 4.......................................1 Views menu introduction .2....................................................................2.........7 Equipment menu introduction..................................2 TERMINOLOGY................................................2...................................................................................................................1....................2.................2 Configuration menu introduction........2...............................2...................4 Supervision menu introduction.........21 2......52 SET ACD LEVEL...............2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state ..............................54 01 SC..................................16 1.5 MS-SPRing menu introduction...43 4...............................39 4......................1 SCOPE....................................................................................2................................... .....................................................................................4 OS C ONFIGURATION ..............93 9...................1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc .....................................................................................................................................6 LAPD C ONFIGURATION ..........................................74 8..............................................81 8..1 DISPLAYING EXTERNAL POINTS......................65 7...............7 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION ..............88 8....16 IP OVER OSI..............................................................9 MANUAL ES A DJACENCIES TABLE CONFIGURATION .....................4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3...................................................85 8.................11 IP S TATIC ROUTING CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................................................................................1 Expanding or reducing external points list ................................................................................................104 9.....................................1 INTRODUCTION AND NAVIGATION ..............................83 8..........89 8................1 ALARMS SURVEILLANCE ...............................................................................5.............................4.............................................103 9....70 8.................1 Upload remote Inventory......................................56 7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT............56 6......69 8.......86 8...........................91 9 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT.............62 7..........................................2 View Remote Inventory ..........................102 9..............................................69 8....................................................................................66 7.....................................................................................................102 9.... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization........4................................................................. Passing on and copying of this document..........6 REMOTE INVENTORY .........2 SET AND CHANGE OR REMOVE BOARD/SUBRACK ......................3 CONNECT FAN TO CONGI BOARD ..........................................1..........................................3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP ..............4......71 8................84 8..............................1 Setting a board in service ..............................................................................89 8...................................................................71 8..................................78 8..............................TO-POINT INTERFACES...............98 9.................................................14 ISA BOARD IP ADDRESS .............................69 8..........86 8......................................3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state ......................................12 OSPF A REA TABLE CONFIGURATION ...........................................76 8.............3 INTERNAL LINK MONITOR ..........................................2 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING VIEWS ................................................................................................66 7...........8 REACHABLE ADDRESS PREFIXES CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 3/399 All rights reserved.................................................. ...................................................5 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION..............................54 6...............15 OSI OVER IP .6...............................2 EXTERNAL POINTS CONFIGURATION .............................10 IP C ONFIGURATION ........108 10................................................................................5 REMOTE INVENTORY ............................................................................4 BOARD ADMINISTRATIVE STATE .....................................................................5 NTP S ERVER CONFIGURATION ...101 9...................................3 LOCAL CONFIGURATION ..................67 8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT ..1 OVERVIEW ON COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING DOMAIN.................................................................1 ED INTRODUCTION ..........2 Setting a board out of service.....................................10.........................................4 LOG BROWSING ......................................................................................5.....................................................................7 SHOW SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT.....60 7......93 9...........................1..............................63 7..................................................................13 IP A DDRESS CONFIGURATION OF POINT...........................1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management ...................90 8....1...............................72 8...............................................1.....2 ABNORMAL CONDITION LIST .................1..........................................................................................103 9.....................................2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains...................................103 9........................................................77 8............................................................................................................................................106 10 BOARD VIEW..........60 7..........................................................108 01 SC....................... ......2..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Single Fibber Configuration...............................117 11.......140 11..............3........................6..6..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................161 13.....134 11.........................................161 13..............8 SHOW SUPPORTING BOARD ......122 11...........................................................................11 PORT MODE OVERVIEW.....................................................180 14..................................................................169 13........................9 NAVIGATE TO TRANSMISSION VIEW....138 11...........................................154 EPS OVERVIEW ...........................................................6..............................................................................................................................................1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration...................................................................7 MSP C OMMANDS ..168 13.........................................................................................................3 MSP C REATE ...............6.................2........5 AU4 C ONCATENATION .......1 ARCHITECTURE TYPES...............................................................2 MSP OPTIONS INTRODUCTION ........123 11..............................................119 11.............................................3 12.4.....................129 11..........................................................................4 SET RETIMING ................................................................................................................1 12.......7 TP F RAME MODE CONFIGURATION ..................141 11.............................................130 11...........................................................6.................179 14.................................................1 INTRODUCTION ............................4 12.....172 13......166 13.................................................3 PORT VIEW MENU...........4 MSP MANAGEMENT .....................................................................8 Control Path Activation........................................143 11..148 12...........133 11......................................................162 13........................................2 BOARD VIEW MENU ..181 ED 01 SC.................................161 13...............114 11.......................................135 11...........................................................................................................9 LCAS management..153 SWITCHING EPS......................168 13....118 11........................148 MANAGEMENT: CONSULTING AND MODIFYING EPS...........................................6 PHYSICAL MEDIA OPTION MENU.............................................................................8 MSP OVERVIEW ....... 13 MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT ..........2 Show Optical Configuration ...........2 12........6 Ethernet Port Configuration ........................................2.................................149 CONFIGURATION: REVERTIVE AND WTR FOR EPS.3 Show supporting equipment........129 11...........................................................................................111 10........................6 DISPLAY OF PROTECTION STATE.................................................................10 NAVIGATE TO MONITORING VIEW ............................................................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..........................................2 PORT VIEW: ELEMENTS ON THE TP............................................................................................................................................... Passing on and copying of this document.............1 View Description.......................155 All rights reserved...115 11.....................2 VIEW ELEMENTS ................................6....................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 4/399 ......10...126 11.....................................5 Line Length Configuration...............................7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol ............................................................................................................................4 Ms Configuration .........................................................1 Port Access .........................113 11 PORT VIEW ...................................179 14.....................................144 12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (EPS) ....................................................................................................3 VIEW LAYOUT.......114 11..........180 14.......................112 10............................................6..................................111 10....................127 11.........6..........1 OVERVIEW .............................1 MSP modification ......................................5 MSP D ELETE .......................................................................................................................2 Change Physical Interface .................................6..........................................................................5 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................174 14 TRANSMISSION VIEW...................................................................... ...................................................................................2 Create a Cross-Connection ..............217 15 CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT....................246 15......................1 INTRODUCTION .....................1......................1 Search Criteria..........................................212 14.........................................................................213 14........................1..................205 14......................................................200 14.............................................1...............................................................1 Overview..............14 NAVIGATION COMMANDS .200 14..........................4 Navigate to Port View.............................6.........................209 14.....................................................219 15.....14.........................2 Hide .203 14..........235 15.....4 Dynamic View Behaviour ......215 14..........3 Show Supported Board ................9 TERMINATE /D ISTERMINATE TP.................7 TP F RAME MODE CONFIGURATION ...........3..............................181 14.......................................................................219 15..1........................239 15.........1 Expand..............240 15.................5......201 14...................................237 15......................229 15...................192 14.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...................1.......................................1 TP Search.3.............216 14.............................. Passing on and copying of this document.......................2 OPERATIVE SEQUENCE TO EXECUTE CROSS -CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................1.........................................................................222 15.......................................................14........................................181 14............................3 Modify a Cross-Connection ............................2 Disterminate TP..............10.................................... .......................................................................................1 Terminate TP .........5 Navigate to HOA Port ......13 PHYSICAL MEDIA ....................3...........14...........................2 Loopback Management..219 15.............................................219 15.....................2 Multiplex Structures for SDH ..........................................................5 ADD TP .........................................182 14....................3.....231 15..............3 Actions available....................................................254 ED 01 SC........................................................................5 Cross-Connection Types..........................206 14..................................4 Mapping Tables: TP Names.............................227 15...................8 TP THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION ........183 14...............................................................................................214 14....................................................................................184 14..........................................................................................................14....................6.................................................................................4...............................6 TP C ONFIGURATION .................201 14.......2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View...........................................11 STRUCTURE TPS ...............3 Naming TPs........2 Cross-Connection List .....................................3 Definition of Termination Points (TP)..............................................................................................2 J0 Section Trace management............198 14...233 15..........................4...........................................................202 14.......12....9.....................................................................................5...................1 Cross-Connection Parameters..14...206 14.........195 14........1 High Order TP Configuration.................14.................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 5/399 All rights reserved..................................................................4...................................................................................................192 14.....................................................................................................................4 CREATE /MODIFY CROSS -CONNECTIONS .........................................................10 MONITORING OPERATIONS ..................3......6...........................................3 Low Order TP Configuration......................................................3 CROSS -CONNECTIONS MANAGEMENT.........................10............................1 Creation/Deletion..................13..............................................................214 14...................196 14.....................................................................................................................216 14...........................................................................................................................241 15......................199 14...............................228 15.............................4 TRANSMISSION VIEW ACCESS AND MENU .................................1 Activate a Cross-Connection......254 15...............................................1 Loopback Configuration ................12...............................................252 15..............................................................................5 ACTIVATE/D EACTIVATE /D ELETE CROSS-CONNECTIONS ......................12 LOOPBACK....................................................................1 Set Domain................2 Configuration.............3...182 14.................................................................6 Cross-Connection Protection ..........................9...................................... .................................................................293 17..................................................6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE..........310 ED 01 SC...................................271 OH TP DELETING ......................1 16.255 15...........................................15.......8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA................1..........3 Delete a Cross-Connection.....................................255 15............................3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting ................1......................................................................................................................................1.............................................................................................................281 17..............255 15........................................................................................10 Data Collection .. Passing on and copying of this document........309 18...............304 18......279 17...........................................296 18 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT .........................1....................................................1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................4 DISPLAY HISTORY DATA ........................................278 17.....5 PM THRESHOLD TABLE SELECTION.................258 15.....................................5......1.....................................................9 Performance Data Collection .............1.............................2................303 18.....................................................................................1...........6..............................................................................................................................11 Performance Monitoring History .............................................................................................................. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.301 18..............6.......2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection .......... 16........................................................................................280 17............................................255 15........12 Thresholds.....................................303 18.........275 17................6 16............6...7 PROTECTION SWITCHING ..........................................................................4 16....................................1 Overview.............................................................2 Synchronization View................2...........1......................1 Creation ................2 Modification .......272 OH PHONE PARAMETERS ........306 18...................................................................................................................................................4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS....................................................................................................................................................................265 OH TP CREATION ..............................................280 17......259 15.........................................................................277 17..3 DISPLAY CURRENT DATA ............2 Supported Performance Counters...................1............................5..............3 16..........275 17....................................................9 SHOW CROSS-CONNECTED TPS ...............................................................2..............................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 6/399 ..................................1 Split a Cross-Connection ............................................263 All rights reserved............2 CONFIGURATION .......................2..............1.........................6 SPLIT AND JOIN CROSS-CONNECTIONS ......................................5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria ........................................................................2 Join Two Cross-Connections ..................6......................................286 17........................6.........................................273 17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING .................................................293 17.................................280 17..................................................................................1..........7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM)........3 Display.....................................................5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting ..301 18.......................................275 17........................................................279 17........................................2 16..6 PM THRESHOLD TABLE CREATION / MODIFICATION / D ISPLAY .........................4 Synchronization Protection Commands ...............291 17..............................................................2 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT ....264 OH C ROSS CONNECTION ........................8 PRINT............................................................................................7 PM OVERVIEW .................................260 16 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT........1.294 17.........................278 17.............................7 INTRODUCTION ..............257 15....3 Timing Source Configuration......263 OVERHEAD VIEWS .........275 17...................................278 17...........................2...............................1 Displaying the Synchronization View...............................1 INTRODUCTION ......295 17.....................................................................................................5 16.288 17.....278 17.................................263 OH C ONNECTION OVERVIEW....................... .2 ATM/PR_EA/E THERNET BOARD TTPS CREATION ......................................2.............332 19.......................2...................322 19................368 20............ Passing on and copying of this document..313 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit .....................................6 MIB MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................................2................320 19..................333 19..............................1 INTRODUCTION ....3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands.........................................................2..................................................................................2...............................374 20...................................................316 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration........................1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration...5 MS-SPRING P ROTECTION STATUS AND COMMANDS FOR 2 FIBER TERRESTRIAL APPLICATION .......................................................4 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT ...............................................................1 ATM boards.......................334 19........................................2 MS-SPRING CONNECTION CONFIGURA TION ADVICES ................................................................................371 20...........................................8 18............... ED 01 SC..................1 Software Download upgrade .............368 20....10 18....................................................................345 20 ISA PORT CONFIGURATION ......................................387 21...........................................320 19....................2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD OPERATIVE SEQUENCE ..........................................1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING....312 Change T4 <-> T5 ......2.....5 SW PACKAGE ACTIVATION AND UNITS INFORMATION ..............................................................................................................................................1 MS-SPRING INTRODUCTION ........12 SSU Configuration .......................................................2 External commands (2F)........................320 19...3 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MANAGER MENU ......................368 20................1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices................1..........4.2..................................................................................................332 19...... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..........................................................2..............379 20...................4.......2..........2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications....1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands........................................................................................................387 21.......5..382 21 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT .........................2...................................321 19.....................................3 OPERATIVE SEQUENCE TO CONFIGURE MS-SPRING ...................................... Deactivate and Delete commands..........1 GENERALITIES AND DESCRIPTIONS .................396 21................................................2........4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board....................................................................................2................18..............................4 INIT DOWNLOAD....2 PR_EA boards ..........2................................2 NE Software package installation procedure.....................11 18............314 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4...........................................5.............................5.......................................................................................6 ES4-8FE boards......394 21..........................................9 18.............................368 20.............................................................................386 21..........326 19....2..............1 Naming Conventions ....................388 21....................317 Show Timing Source....2...............3......................4 2F Protection Status Visualization............................318 19 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT..311 Remove Timing Reference...................................................................................................7 18..................................................................................378 20................................................................................386 21........................5 ES1-8FE boards.320 19..................................3 Activate.....5..........................................................393 21...........................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 7/399 ..........4.....6 18....................................2.......320 19..........398 All rights reserved........................3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board................386 21........................320 19........341 19.............. ............................................................................................. Set ACD level.......... Abnormal condition menu option ...31 Figure 3................................... ...... Consulting and/or setting the local NE time...................... EML--USM main view organization..............................................................1 .56 Figure 26.....................44 Figure 12................. Menu options flow chart -............. External points view............... Alarm persistency Time Configuration.........................................43 Figure 11................................................................. Configuring external points.................. Comm/Routing options ...............................................74 Figure 43...................66 Figure 38.................................................................. Menu options flow chart – 2 ....65 Figure 36.........................................................47 Figure 14..................... Restart NE confirmation ................ Opening the external points view .............72 Figure 42............. ......... ASAPs Management dialogue box...................................................................65 Figure 37.............................................51 Figure 20........ OS Configuration...LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES FIGURES Figure 1.................................67 Figure 40..........................................61 Figure 32...........................................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 8/399 All rights reserved... NE management: setting the access state.......................................... Alarm re--synchronization..........................55 Figure 25.................................................................................. NE Time dialogue box ...............................................................................53 Figure 23.......... Set ASAP dialogue box..................................................................................76 Figure 44............................45 Figure 13.. Remote Inventory completed ............................................................38 Figure 7................. ..................................................50 Figure 17.................................................... ASAP Edition dialogue box............. Routing sub domain organization example .................... Alarm Surveillance ....................................................................................................................54 Figure 24...........39 Figure 8..................................... Set Manager list......40 Figure 9...................................................................... Menu options flow chart – 3 ........................................................... Expanding or reducing the external points list...............57 Figure 29.. Passing on and copying of this document..51 Figure 19............ Log Browsing option in Network Element context view .........................................50 Figure 18.......................................... Set SdhNE Alarms Severities ............33 Figure 5........................56 Figure 27..... Local Configuration ............................. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3.......................... Internal Link Monitor .............52 Figure 22................................ External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ............................................................................. ........ .............................................. Alarms persistency Configuration Menu option......................................................................................................... Remote Inventory confirmation request..................................................................................... Allow alarm notifications .77 Figure 45............. .........78 ED 01 SC...................... NTP Server Configuration........... External input point configuration dialogue box .........................34 Figure 6....................................................................................................................................... Alarm Surveillance .....................51 Figure 21.61 Figure 31................................49 Figure 16............................... ...........49 Figure 15. Example of loopback dialog window management....58 Figure 30.............................................................................67 Figure 39.. Example of abnormal condition list........................................................................................ View Remote Inventory...................................................... Menu options flow chart – 4 ...........................................................62 Figure 34.............................62 Figure 33..............32 Figure 4................................................ External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) ...................57 Figure 28....41 Figure 10.......................................................................................................... Inhibit alarm notification ......................................................................................................... NE EML-USM Main view..........................................................................................63 Figure 35................................................................................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization........................................18 Figure 2............................. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ...........................................................71 Figure 41..... ...................................................................... PDH and ATM port) .................................. IP Static Routing Configuration......................................... Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board .................... Software Description dialogue box........ OSI over IP Tunneling configuration ............................................116 Figure 82.................................................120 Figure 87....................... OSPF Area Table Configuration..................................................................104 Figure 69....................................................Subracks level.................................112 Figure 78................... Connect FAN to CONGI................... Example of a SDH Port View ..................125 Figure 92...................100 Figure 65..................101 Figure 66................ Passing on and copying of this document......................................................111 Figure 77..........................102 Figure 67..................................................................................... Termination TP box...............................118 Figure 84... Example of a Board View........................... Select Output Format for file ....................105 Figure 70..............115 Figure 81..........................105 Figure 71......................L2 only parameter ........106 Figure 72.........................119 Figure 86.............................80 Figure 48..89 Figure 56.................................................................................. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis.................... Remote Inventory.109 Figure 74.......... Equipment Overview -.........................124 Figure 91............ Set Retiming enable (after)........123 Figure 90......................................... .....................................92 Figure 59..........Subrack level................................................. Select Printer ..........................................................................................................................Figure 46............ Ethernet Configuration ............................ Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) ............122 Figure 89..88 Figure 55.........................112 Figure 79..84 Figure 52......... RAP Configuration ................................. SC...............3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 9/399 ....................117 Figure 83..........................................Rack level (with Fans subrack)..................................................................................................................... Equipment Overview -................................128 ED 01 All rights reserved...................95 Figure 61.96 Figure 62.................................................................................. Equipment Overview..127 Figure 94......................................................... Visualizing a port optical parameters ........................................................................................................ LAPD Configuration dialog .................................... AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands.......110 Figure 76.............................................. Remove FAN connection from CONGI.....................................................................90 Figure 58......................................85 Figure 53..80 Figure 47.................................................................83 Figure 51....................... ISA Board IP Address...............................88 Figure 54......................... Automatic Laser Shutdown Management ............. Equipment Overview ..................126 Figure 93.................121 Figure 88.........................................................................................................82 Figure 50...NE level ..................... IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces........Rack level (without Fans subrack).................................................................................113 Figure 80.......... Example of a concatenated AU4c .........................................110 Figure 75............................103 Figure 68.................................................................................783 Adaptation TP box.....................97 Figure 63.......................... After “ Port Access”selection (example) ......................................................................................................................................... Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber . Ethernet Configuration -......................................................................................81 Figure 49................... Creation LAPD Interface ........................................................................................ Change Physical Interface..........107 Figure 73.... Set Retiming enable (before) ............. Equipment Overview -......... Physical media menu (SDH port example)............. Consulting a board’ s administrative state ...................................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization........................98 Figure 64.........................................118 Figure 85.................... Board menu options ......................................................94 Figure 60............................................. ALS and Laser current state (example) .. G................................................... Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view ...................................... . Equipment menu ......... MESA Configuration........................... Examples of port menu options (SDH........................................................ IP over OS ...............90 Figure 57........................................ Confirmation to change LAPD Role ...... Subrack level ........ The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) ............. ..................................137 Figure 105........................................... EPS Management dialogue box...................................................................... MSP Create Option........ MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) .......................... EPS: board selection........................................................... EPS: choose protected ...................................................................146 Figure 113............. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) .......................................................................................................................... TP Search .... MSP overview...........................166 Figure 133..... MSP schema creation Port dialog .................. Port view after “ Open Port View”commands ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................168 Figure 136.........129 Figure 96...........................................................................................................................................174 Figure 141..................................149 Figure 115.....................................149 Figure 116......................... EPS Management dialogue box..................................................... MSP Schema Creation...................................................................................................171 Figure 138........ Ms Configuration ... PDH Line Length Configuration View ........134 Figure 104..........130 Figure 98........180 ED 01 All rights reserved.........................................................................152 Figure 117.........................144 Figure 111.......................................................................143 Figure 110.............................................. Information dialog ............................... TP Frame Mode Configuration .................. EPS functional state from protecting active board view .............................................................. Ethernet Port Configuration options ..............................................176 Figure 142.................. MSP overview after Search (Example) ......................................... Board View Example....................................169 Figure 137........................168 Figure 135......155 Figure 124... MSP Commands option ............................ Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE)............................. Passing on and copying of this document........................................................ Single Fiber Configuration View .......................163 Figure 130............................................... “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection ............................................ EPS overview ..... MSP Commands .........................................................141 Figure 108..........153 Figure 121.. MSP Schema Deletion ......................................... EPS overview after Search (Example) ..........138 Figure 106. LCAS Monitoring .......................... Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board)..................................................156 Figure 125............................. LCAS Configuration............................................... After “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection..133 Figure 102..........................................................................................................153 Figure 120 Configure EPS................................................ EPS Switch dialogue box...157 Figure 126............. ................................................. Consulting EPS ............................................... Symbols Used in Transmission View.......... Port Mode Menu Option......................155 Figure 123.. Port Mode Overview Dialog...........147 Figure 114......... MSP Delete option................................. Board view after “ Open Board View”command ....................................... MSP Management Option...........................................153 Figure 118...........................154 Figure 122....................................142 Figure 109.... View of Monitoring Operations (example) ..................167 Figure 134...........................131 Figure 101..........................................................131 Figure 100..............................................................................................................165 Figure 132........................... SC............................................Figure 95................................... EPS functional state from protected active board view .................160 Figure 128......................... set the selected port mode .......................162 Figure 129............159 Figure 127......173 Figure 140................................................. MSP Management View .........................................172 Figure 139................... Subrack view after “ Open Subrack View”command...............................................178 Figure 143................... Switching EPS ................................................ MSP Protection Status E xamples ................................................................................................129 Figure 97............................145 Figure 112.................................................139 Figure 107.......................................... Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog....................164 Figure 131............153 Figure 119.... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..................................................................................................................................................................133 Figure 103......................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 10/399 ......130 Figure 99..................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 11/399 .................... SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.............198 Figure 163............................190 Figure 155........ Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs .....................................................................................200 Figure 164.................................................................................................................246 ED 01 All rights reserved.190 Figure 154..................226 Figure 180.............. Protection Criteria ...............................218 Figure 177..209 Figure 170........................................220 Figure 178...........................................................................................................237 Figure 190........243 Figure 192............................................................ J2 hexadecimal editor .........231 Figure 188............................ Set Domain ................212 Figure 173........................................................... Degraded Signal Threshold selection......................193 Figure 158.. Transmission View Area ...........................214 Figure 174........................................................... TP Frame Mode Configuration .................... Loopback Transmission View ........ High Order TP Configuration............................ Unidirectional Connection.....................187 Figure 151............................Normal..............................................................230 Figure 186......... Board View............................................................................ Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion.....................Input Protected ........................203 Figure 167...............................................................................197 Figure 162........ Drop and Continue ...................................................................................191 Figure 157.. Low Order TP Configuration ..............................Figure 144........ Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example)......................................... Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ..................................230 Figure 185.............................. Port Loopbacks View. Information Window................................... “ Information...... Example Printout .... J1 hexadecimal editor (example) ......................187 Figure 150....229 Figure 183......................................................195 Figure 160................................................................................................................ TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed .........186 Figure 149......................... Cross connection management cascade menu............................................................................................. SC..............”Dialog for Search Process....................................................................................... TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections . Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example)........212 Figure 172........................................................................181 Figure 145...............235 Figure 189........................... PDH Transport Level Diagram.........................228 Figure 182...................................... Navigate to HOA Port ................................................. Transmission menu options ... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization........................................... Loopback configurations ............................ Initial State ...............................239 Figure 191...................................................................... Bidirectional Connection ..231 Figure 187..........196 Figure 161..................... Protected Broadcast ............................................................................... SDH Transport Level Diagram............. TP Search Dialog.....................221 Figure 179.................................................................................. Loopback Port View.... Print to Printer...................................................... Passing on and copying of this document...............................................................................................................................185 Figure 148................................................ Print to File .Input Protected .......202 Figure 165........................................................229 Figure 184.........................................................................................216 Figure 175........................207 Figure 169....................194 Figure 159..............................191 Figure 156.............................. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options ............. Cross-Connection Icons .......................... Board History Check List .............217 Figure 176................................ Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) ........... J0 Configuration ...... Port View ......................204 Figure 168........................................................ Bidirectional Connection ........................... Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State)...............................................................183 Figure 146..................................................................................................................................................................... Monitor Configuration ................................................................... Loopback Management .227 Figure 181..................................188 Figure 152...............................................................................709 .................. Symbols in TP Search............................184 Figure 147..............189 Figure 153........................211 Figure 171...203 Figure 166...................... Bidirectional Connection ....................................... .......Figure 193................................................................................249 Figure 196........ Protection Actions Dialog................................................ OH Search TP for creation ........................... Synchronization Menu. Force and Manual commands ........................................ Create PM Threshold Table ......... PM Threshold Table Select ...................290 Figure 218......................................299 Figure 226....... Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria .......................................... OH TP deleting ....................... PM question dialog box (example) ..........................................................................300 Figure 227...... Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog.............277 Figure 214....................................................271 Figure 210............................................ Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection... Phone Parameters dialog window..... Current PM Data Dialog (example) ........ Synchronization source removing confirmation.......................... Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection ................................. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...........292 Figure 219......................................... Select Printer .254 Figure 200......309 Figure 234.303 Figure 229.. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 ...................................... .................. Select Output Format.............................. Synchronization source removing .............................................................................. Overhead options .. Passing on and copying of this document.................................................. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu...............................258 Figure 203........... Far End Performance Monitoring Principles...................................................................................... Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message ......304 Figure 230.....................314 Figure 241.................................272 Figure 211..............................................................313 Figure 238.. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection......................................294 Figure 222.............................. PM History Data Dialog (example) ............................................................. Synch.....296 Figure 223..................267 Figure 209.............................. PM Transmission View.................................................... Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection......284 Figure 216............................................................ Change T4 <-> T5: command execution........................... Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection .......................................................................................256 Figure 201......................................257 Figure 202..........................................250 Figure 197...............312 Figure 237.................................................... PM Overview after add TP ... PM Configuration Dialog (example).............................................. SC................... PM Overview Menu item.......................................283 Figure 215...........313 Figure 239................................251 Figure 198....................................... Search for Cross-Connection Output................................. Non-Protected Cross-Connection.......260 Figure 204.............................................................................................................................................................260 Figure 205......................................................... OH TP creation.............3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 12/399 .... PM Port View.............................314 Figure 240............... Change T4 <-> T5 menu .......................................................... Internal organization of the SETS.................................. Obtaining the synchronization view .......... SSU Configuration ................................................................247 Figure 195.................................... PM Overview .........................................................................................................................273 Figure 213.273 Figure 212..................... Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection ..................... Source configuration for ADM equipment.........................246 Figure 194........................................... Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments................. Synchronization View Example ................ Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection ...........................................................................................253 Figure 199.................................. Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog ..................................308 Figure 233.....................................298 Figure 225..................301 Figure 228.................... Lockout..................................306 Figure 231................ Modify PM Threshold Table .........307 Figure 232................................. Add TP for PM Overview ........293 Figure 221..........................................................312 Figure 236...............315 ED 01 All rights reserved..293 Figure 220..................................................288 Figure 217........................................297 Figure 224....................................................................................................................................265 Figure 207.........................311 Figure 235.....................................................................................................262 Figure 206......266 Figure 208. Creation of a Unidirectional.............................. ................................................... Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message ...................335 Figure 272....................................................... Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) .................................................315 Figure 243......................... Connections of the ring ............. Example of confirmation dialog box................323 Figure 250........324 Figure 251.......336 Figure 273......... Example of error message .................................................327 Figure 256......................................333 Figure 268... Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution..................326 Figure 254...................349 Figure 288............324 Figure 252.......................... Node Id and associated ring node position........................Figure 242. Tail-end / Head-end association............................................................................ Squelching table of Node B...........................345 Figure 285........328 Figure 259.................334 Figure 269...............344 Figure 284..........................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 13/399 .......................................................................................... Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F).......................................................................................................317 Figure 245......................................................................................................................................................................... Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) ......................................... Display MS–SPRing pull down menu ..................... West side .............................. Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F) ................. SC..............................................................329 Figure 261.................... Example of a ring traffic ................................................ Transmission SSM Quality...............................................322 Figure 249...................... Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F)...........................319 Figure 247.....347 Figure 286........ Ring Protection (2F) ............................ Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network ................. East side .....................................343 Figure 283..... Lockout commands (2F) ............................................ Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) ..........................................................341 Figure 280.................................................. Squelching table of Node D........................ Clear WTR command (2F) ...............334 Figure 270.......335 Figure 271...... East side.... Squelching table of Node B... Passing on and copying of this document............................... Ring network reference scheme (2F) ...................................................330 Figure 263..............338 Figure 276....... Squelching table of Node A....................................................................... Squelching table of Node D.342 Figure 282......... Confirmation message ......341 Figure 279............... West side...................................................................... Squelching table ................................................. Activated MS-SPRing Management .................. Lockout command and non-served failures (2F) ............... West side ............................................................................................................................................... MS-SPRing Management dialog box.330 Figure 262......................................................................................................................331 Figure 265............................316 Figure 244............... T4 equal T0 setting .............................350 ED 01 All rights reserved.................. Creation Schema dialog box............................................... Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F) ..........327 Figure 257....... Ring map configuration .................. WTR dialog box.........................................................318 Figure 246...................................................329 Figure 260............328 Figure 258.................................. East side.............................................................................................. Squelching table of Node C................................. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization......................................... Squelching table of Node C................... East side ....... Examples of Double ring failure...................... Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization ......................................338 Figure 275...............348 Figure 287.... Forced and Manual Commands (2F)..................................................................332 Figure 267...340 Figure 278................ West side.. Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) ...........................325 Figure 253.. Squelching table of Node A..326 Figure 255.............................341 Figure 281............. Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F) ....337 Figure 274..339 Figure 277......... Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F)....................................................... Timing Source Example .....................................................................322 Figure 248..................... Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F).............................332 Figure 266.......331 Figure 264............................................................... ....................................393 Figure 325...384 Figure 316....375 Figure 308...............................................393 Figure 324................... Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM)....... ETH–MB (with defined TPs)............................................... Software Download general principle ...................................... MPLS port view example ..... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN) ..................................................371 Figure 304......................................................356 Figure 294...........378 Figure 311..... PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields).................................................................385 Figure 317............................ Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN) ...... Navigate to ETH port view (example) ...........................................353 Figure 292....370 Figure 303................................................. PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs)............................. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A) ........... SDH software package installation ............................374 Figure 307..........354 Figure 293................................... ES4-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) . ES4-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) .............................358 Figure 295. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN) .... Navigate to ETH port view (example) ..........363 Figure 299.... ED 01 SC........................... OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) .......................366 Figure 301............ ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs) ............................. ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) ................... Control Path activation window (example)............................................................ ETH–MB (initial empty fieds).......................................................................................395 Figure 328............................................................ ATM software package installation (example) ....Figure 289.......382 Figure 314...373 Figure 306......................... Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN).................................394 Figure 326.............376 Figure 309.. Passing on and copying of this document.............................. Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN) ........ Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN) ...362 Figure 298.........................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 14/399 .................389 Figure 319.................................. Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN) ...........................................................................392 Figure 323...................... Detail software package (example).................................................................. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle" .............396 Figure 329....................................390 Figure 321...................................................................................................... Navigate to ATM port view (example) ..................................................... Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN) ............................. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields)...................380 Figure 312.....351 Figure 290.................................... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) ..............................................................361 Figure 297............. Software download in progress (example) ...... ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) ...... Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN) 364 Figure 300... ETHERNET port view example .........................................................389 Figure 320.................................394 Figure 327................377 Figure 310................. NE MIB management ...............................372 Figure 305................359 Figure 296.................................. Software Package Information dialogue box (example)................. Software Package Administration view .......... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization....................................369 Figure 302............................................ SW Downloading dialogue box example .........................................................................................383 Figure 315. Download menu ......391 Figure 322...........................386 Figure 318..................399 All rights reserved.................398 Figure 331...............................................................................397 Figure 330........................... Equipment view .................................... Software Administration menu............................................................ Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN) .......................352 Figure 291......381 Figure 313.......... ...................................................173 Table 2...................................... Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label..............................................292 Table 8........227 Table 4...............252 Table 7...................... Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation ... Maximum Performance Parameter Values.............................................. Passing on and copying of this document....................295 All rights reserved......... MSP commands and Auto -switch protection priority ..... Threshold table entities association.........................................................................................244 Table 6...............................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 15/399 .......................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization............................................................ ED 01 SC..................................... PDH TPs .................................TABLES Table 1.. Modifiable Parameters ................................194 Table 3....... SDH TPs ............228 Table 5................................................................................................................................ 2. using the Craft Terminal (CT).1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand.2.1 1. 1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements.Introduction manual 1. The menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail. 1. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --. configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 16/399 . 1. ED 01 SC.1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --.1 INTRODUCTION Scope All rights reserved.1. Passing on and copying of this document.2 Terminology 1. The different functionalities related to the equipment views .1. Passing on and copying of this document. Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook.2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS In this chapter the organization of the EML--USM screen. ED 01 SC. It contains the following fields. At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles. than the accessible menu options are listed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. First is introduced the view organization. l View area l Message/state area The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to perform all the configuration and supervision and display the specific selected item. External Point. that differs according the NE type: -. l Management status control panel l View title. EML--USM view organization The EML--USM view (see Figure 1) is the first window presented to the operator after the login. The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the description. and Transmission.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 17/399 . Equipment.1 All rights reserved. is described. which provide you with information needed to manage the NE: l Severity alarm synthesis. l Domain alarm synthesis.Domain alarm synthesis The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE is: Sync hronization. 2. except for the following information. presented after the NE login. EML--USM main view organization. Figure 5.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 18/399 . This paragraph lists all the menu options and then more details on the relevant contained entries. Figure 4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 1. Figure 3. ED 01 SC...All rights reserved. The flow charts of Figure 2. For each of them the relevant operative functions a re briefly introduced.. 2. summarize the menu options.2 Introduction on the EML--USM menu options The menu bar allows performing configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element. Passing on and copying of this document.. EPS and cross-connection). the menus are: • Permanent Menus o Views (first column). In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed. set TMN and Overhead parameters and to show or modify some parameters (performance monitoring. • Diagnosis (third column). To navigate among the views and set TMN and Overhead parameters. ATM/IP/ETH creation. only when a particular object or option is selected. • All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. remote inventory internal link monitor). Passing on and copying of this document. They are not presented according the menu option sequence but according a functional subdivision. Further. MIB management). Configuration (second column). Craft Terminal enabling). in the menu bar there are other menus. • Supervision (fourth column). Staring from the left . • Other Menus o Equipment (eighth column).From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are given. MSP. presented as an alternative. To set general configuration of the NE. setting the relevant configuration.e. performance monitoring. To manage the NE software (download. • MS_SPRing (fifth column) To manage the 2-fiber MS_SPRing protection. • Help (last column). To get information about the NE (alarms. • Download (sixth column). To activate the help.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 19/399 . To set the supervision states (i. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • EPS (seventh column). • Transmission (seventh column). It is the entry point for the Port view. • Port (seventh column). setting the relevant configuration. It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. All rights reserved. To show and modify synchronization parameters. which compose it. Passing on and copying of this document. Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to the Board view. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources. To manage the EPS protection.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 20/399 . setting the relevant configuration. setting the boards. To show the physical port available in a specific board. To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port. From the Equipment view the Board view can be accessed. From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal application for the ATM/IP traffic configuration. • External Points (seventh column). To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms. • Board (eighth column). • Synchronization (seventh column). It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port.To manage the NE as a whole. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The "External Point" menu is then available on the menu bar.2. • • • • • • • 2. ED SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The "Transmission" menu is then available on the menu bar. Equipment: Open the Equipment view. Synchronization: Open the Synchronization view. It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area. without stopping the supervision All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 21/399 . Open in Window: Navigate and show the contents of the selected object.Threshold table • • • EPS overview : 01 Allows displaying as well as search for EPS states.1 Views menu introduction This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters. The current view doesn't change but a new window with a new view is opened.2.2 Configuration menu introduction This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters. Set Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected object Set SdhNe Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile referred to the equipment level. Go to the next view.2. opening the following menu options: . by means of the following entries: • • • Alarm Severities: Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. The "Synchronization" menu is then available on the menu bar Refresh: The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment between the CT and the managed NE. Performance: Manage the Performance Monitoring domain. Open Object: Navigate and show the contents of the selected object: the current view change. This misalignment is due to a loss of notifications coming from the NE. Used to define the PM parameters. by means of the following entries: • • • Backward : Forward: Go back to the previous view. NE Time: Display and set the NE local time. Transmission: Open the Transmission view. Close: of the NE Close the EML-USM view. The "Equipment" menu and the "EPS" menu are then available on the menu bar. External Points: Open the External Point view. • • • Set ACD level: Cross Connection Management: Manage the connection of the paths. Used to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes. Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. Comm/Routing: Enter the Communication and Routing management. opening the following menu options: • • • • Local configuration OS Configuration NTP Server Configuration Interfaces Configuration • LAPD Configuration Ethernet Configuration • All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2. Used to define the parameters in the following menu options: OH Cross Connection OH Phone Parameter OH TP creation OH TP deleting • • • MSP overview: Allows displaying as well as search for MSP states. PM overview : Allows displaying performance overview. OSI Routing Configuration RAP Configuration MESA Configuration • IP Configuration IP Static Routing Configuration OSPC Area Configuration IP Address Configuration of point-to-point interfaces ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration OSI Over IP IP over OSI • Overhead: Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes.3 Diagnosis menu introduction This menu permits to get information about the NE. Passing on and copying of this document. ISA Port Configuration: It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections 2. by means of the following entries: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 22/399 . Allow / Inhibits Notifs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 23/399 . protection board) and the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition. Passing on and copying of this document.• Alarms: Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE. Dataflow Analyzer. by means of the following entries: • Access State : Manage the supervision access to the NE. It opens the following menu options: Resynchronize. ED 01 SC. ALS Handler. • • • 2. previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervisory" menu.4 Supervision menu introduction This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE.2. Abnormal Condition list Display the list of the object class (Loopback. with CT or OS. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • • • Upload Remote Inventory: Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. Set Manager list Restart NE: Reset the NE software. It opens the following menu options: NE alarms Object alarms Subtree alarms Equipment alarms Transmission alarms External Points alarms All rights reserved. Internal Link Monitor: Indicates the preference of failure on Rx or Tx side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active/standby MATRIX board. • Log Browsing: Manage the events stored in the NE. It opens the following menu options: OS Requested • Alarms: Manage the alarms supervision of the NE. It opens the following menu options: Alarm Log Event Log Software Trace Log • View Remote Inventory : Display the remote inventory data. 5 MS-SPRing menu introduction This menu permits to age the 2-fiber and 4-fiber MS-SPRing protection (the last is not operative in current release).2. upgrading the NE. Modify: Change the board type without previously remove it. Reset: Not operative. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B. Set in service: Insert a lock symbol in the board. This option is available only after ED 01 SC. It opens the following menu options: Subrack level Board level • • • • • • • ISA Board IP Address: Used to define the ISA board IP address N. which compose it. This option is available only at Subrack view level. Units info : Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks. • • • Init download: Manage the software download. by means of the following entries: • • Set: Add or change the board type (a list is proposed). Mib management: Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore of backup file. Set out of service Delete the lock symbol in the board.2. Connect FAN to CONGI #10: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot 10.1 optical module) Remove: Remove the board. • • Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 24/399 . it is possible to change from an Long and Short 1. by means of the following entries: All rights reserved. N. Software description: Show information on the software of the board. setting the relevant configuration. enabling changes. It is only possible between compatible board or modules (ex. by means of the following entries: Main dialog for MS-SPRing management: Contains all the command to set and manage the MS-SPRing 2.7 Equipment menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole. setting the boards. Passing on and copying of this document.2. Remote Inventory: Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment.6 Download menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE software.B.2. 2. The menu differs according the port type (SDH. but the available menu permits to configure the port (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. All rights reserved. It permits navigation to the Transmission view. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path Trace) on Synchronous TP's.B. • Connect FAN to CONGI # 12: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot12. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. 2. by means of the entries indicated in the following list. The "Port view" is reached by means the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed alarms presented.having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. N. ISA Port Configuration: It allows creating the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections. This menu is available only if an ATM/IP/ETH board has been equipped in the subrack. ATM. Passing on and copying of this document.B.2. by means of the following entries: • • • • Port Access: Access the "Port view". Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi-mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switch able). 2. IP and ETHERNET).8 Board menu introduction This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol) and to access the port view. N.9 Port menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port. • ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 25/399 . HOA. TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter.2. PDH. Not available for PDH port.• • TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. It opens the following menu options: Creation / Deletion Configuration • Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Passing on and copying of this document. It opens the following menu options: MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete • Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. Not applicable to HOA port. It opens the following menu options: Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data • Loopback: Enter the loopback management. SUT . It opens the following options: Enable Disable • All rights reserved. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management • MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 26/399 . Set Retiming: Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. It opens a menu which differs according the port type: • SDH port: ED 01 SC. It opens the following options: Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection • • Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Only for SDH ports view. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 27/399 . setting the relevant configuration.10 EPS menu introduction This menu permits to manage the EPS protection. - ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration LAPD Configuration Ms Configuration PDH port: Line Length Configuration HDSL Configuration NT G703/704 Configuration NT X21 Configuration • ETHERNET port: Remote Laser Management ALS Management Ethernet Port Configuration Ethernet Mapping protocol ISA Port Configuration Control Path Activation • • • Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. opening all TP's Navigate to monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related POM/SUT/TCM and TCT object if present. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section Protections and Loopbacks functions.• All rights reserved.2. Switch: Manage the EPS operator commands (Force.11 Transmission menu introduction This menu permits to show and set the Termina tion Point of the equipment. Configure: Set revertive / not revertive and WTR parameters. by means of the following entries: • • • Management: Set EPS protections. Passing on and copying of this document. Lockout) 2.2. Manual. 2. It permits navigation to the Port view. setting the relevant configuration. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Terminate TP: Terminate the AU4 -CTP paths. It opens the following menu options: Creation / deletion Configuration • Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.The menu lists the following entries: • • Add TP: Search and add TP to the transmission view. SUT. Passing on and copying of this document. Only for PDH ports views. TP Threshold configuration: Set B2 Ex BER and Signal Degrade threshold.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 28/399 . It opens the following menu options: Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection Port Switch Over Show Cross Connected TP's • • • • • • Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM. It opens the following menu options: Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data ED 01 SC. It opens the following menu options: Lower TP Upper TP Selected TP • • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace. Expand: Display the TP's related to a selected TP. • Hide: Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view. It opens the following menu options: Next level of lower TP All lower TP Next level of upper TP All upper TP All rights reserved. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. Disterminate TP: Disterminate the AU4-CTP paths. than presented in the screen. TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Passing on and copying of this document. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: It opens the following menu options: Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management • All rights reserved.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • • ED 01 SC. TU3. VC12) Loopback : Enter the loopback management. It opens the following menu options: MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete NE MSP synthesis • • Show supported board: Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP Navigate to Port view: Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP 2. Physical Media: Manage the TP physical setting. T0 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization source. manual. TU12.• • Structure TP's: Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2. It opens the following menu options: ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration Extra traffic Regeneration Section management Line Length Configuration Set Domain HDSL Configuration NT Configuration X21 Configuration • MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE.12 Synchronization menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status. T4 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM. Protection Command: Manage commands (force. lockout) for the selected timing reference. VC3/VC4. by means of the following entries: • • Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the selected input reference. WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4 synchronization source.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 29/399 . setting the relevant configuration. 2.• • • • • • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 30/399 . SSU Configuration: Set NE single or with SSU. Change 2MHx->2Mbit: Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz to 2Mbit and vice versa. Set T0 Equal T4 Remove T0 Equal T4 Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the selected T1 SDH timing reference. Display: Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm.13 External Points menu introduction This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). Only for PDH ports views.2.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. Show Timing Source: Show the "port view" related to the selected timing reference. • • T0 TEST Configuration: Not used. by means of the following entries: • • Configuration: Set the input/output environmental alarm. Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. Remove Timing Reference Change T4<->T5: Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz (T4) to 2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic”and vice-versa. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It opens the following menu options: Show external Input Points Show external Output Points Show all external Points ED 01 SC. 3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 2. ED 01 SC. Menu options flow chart -. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 3AL 98168 ADAA 31/399 . Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Menu options flow chart – 2 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 32/399 . ED Figure 3. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 4. Menu options flow chart – 3 3AL 98168 ADAA 33/399 . 3 Advices on Navigation principles Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info Model. To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also possible mixing the different ways): • • Double click on the selected object Select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the View pull down menu 01 SC. This general rules are described in the " Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook". Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 5.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 34/399 ED . In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for this NE involved in Navigation and example of Navigation. Menu options flow chart – 4 2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. e. from "port view" to “ board view" or to "transmission view") thus facilitating the operators activity.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 35/399 .Cross Connection . immediately after the NE login.Cross Connection .Transmission pull down menu Open Transmission . The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy.Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i. Views Navigation The first level of the "Equipment view" representation will be displayed directly into the current window. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. The View pull down menu permits to show the following menus: Equipment Transmission Synchronization External Points The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu paths.Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window • Second navigation path: Open View .Equipment pull down menu Double click on Board Select the Board to access the Board view Open Board .Port Access pull down menu Open Port .• Use the Menu option tree structure. All rights reserved.Create Cross Connection pull down menu • Third navigation path: Open Configuration . EXAMPLE: to obtain the "Create Cross Connection" window: • First navigation path: Open View . Passing on and copying of this document. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu.At the top the 1662SMC subrack. It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard. In the Rack Level view two subrack are presented: . ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 36/399 . by double clicking on a port body contained in the board. the Rack level view (Example) is presented. (Example) Further.B. the Equipment level view is presented. the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. The NE hierarchy is generally organized i n the following way: Subrack > board > port > TP. the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. N. by selecting the Backward option from the views menu Go to the next view. by selecting the Forward option from the view menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.At the bottom the Fans Subrack. Passing on and copying of this document. The port view displays the inner TPs. named SR62C (Example) . It is also possible to: Go back to the previous view. Further. Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • • All rights reserved. named SRFAN (Example) The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack. • • The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view By double clicking on a board body.Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The EML-USM Main view is presented as for the following figure. Passing on and copying of this document.2 NE supervision and login The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE EMLUSM view described in this handbook. ED 01 SC. Also general Alarm status is presented. Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an update of the management states when the CT has detected the communication failure. All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook. The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs). selecting it and activating "Supervision" and "Login". local access. 3. The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE. Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at USM-EML view level.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 37/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. connection state. as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator's Handbook.1 NE management states All rights reserved. Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management states according to the condition of the connection (supervision. etc). 3.3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 6. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. NE EML-USM Main view 3AL 98168 ADAA 38/399 . Figure 7. In the view the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) All rights reserved. etc). If the LAC is "granted" that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. The Craft Terminal can manage by the OS or the NE. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. NE management: setting the access state. Performance processing on TPs. NE Time. ED 01 SC. If the LAC is "access denied" that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify NE configuration (it can only "read"). In the view the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape. a Local Access Control (LAC) is available. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure. The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views: 4. However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services.1. If the LAC is "requested" that means the CT has requested permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay. These services includes: • • • Reception and processing of alarms.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 39/399 . Alarms configuration.4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (Craft Terminal access. Switching back to the OS access state. To control the competition of the OS and the CT. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 4. 1. which accept or refuse it. option from the Configuration pull down menu. The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked Select the NE Time. ED 01 SC. 4. When communication is lost with the NE. The OS now manages the NE. Passing on and copying of this document. The request is up to the OS. Then select the OS..2 NE Time management All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the OS manages by a craft terminal or the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 40/399 .. the OS automatically recovers the communication and put the state that was set before the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).. N. The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local NE time and check the NTP Status. In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "OS access" operation. option from the Access State.From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Craft access" operation using the Yes or No push buttons.B. N.. If the OS doesn't answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed from a Craft Terminal.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Figure 8. The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or re-aligned on the OS time basis. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time. 4. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 9. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 41/399 .All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. § NTP Main and NTP Spare It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or unreachable. • Time section with the following data: § NE Time and OS Time It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS (Craft Terminal). NE Time dialogue box The following fields are available: • NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters: § NTP protocol It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration) or disabled or empty (grey). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (grey). you will force the change. Passing on and copying of this document.1 a) b) c) d) e) f) Procedure to modify an ASAP Select the TP (or board/port/etc… ) whose ASAP is to be changed From the menu click on “ Configuration”-> “ alarms Severities…. The OS time comes from the PC date configuration that corresponds to the legal GMT time. When the NTP is not present. If you set the NE time. Alarm re-synchronization 4. are: • • • Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management. the OS system re-aligns the time of all supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a configured periodicity.3. with an immediate effect on the NE. • NTP protocol disabled In this case. click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box. This periodicity is common for all the NEs.e. NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable. the Set NE Time With OS Time message is operative and the user can set manually the NE Time (i. mainly related to alarm setting. When both are reachable the NE uses the Main. All rights reserved. Two different operative conditions can be defined: • NTP protocol enabled In this case. However it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism. N. If you do not want to set the NE local time. Allow/Inhibit alarm notification.3 Alarm Configuration The operations described in this chapter. 4.B.” Select one of the “ user”profile (#10001 or #10002) and click on “ Modify” Click on the “ Probable Cause Families”associated to the alarm Select the relevant alarm in the list of “ Probable Cause Name” In the “ Service affecting/non-affecting”fields select the needed severity (critical/major/minor… ) g) Click on “ OK” h) Click on “ Close” 01 ED SC. change the NE time with the Time of the Craft Terminal). The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot set manually the NE Time.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 42/399 . To re-align the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either click on the Apply push button to validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue box.§ Set NE Time With OS Time It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal. 2. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs. equipment alarm).2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction. All rights reserved. An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned. The Severity of the alarm.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 43/399 . option from the Configuration pull down menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Alarm Severities This option permits to configure and display the ASAP. Three important no tions are: • • • The Probable Cause of the alarm. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed. Passing on and copying of this document. predefined or settable by the operator. Figure 10.3.. Select the Alarm Severities. ED 01 SC.i) j) Select the relevant TP and then “ Configuration”-> “ Set Alarms Severities…” In the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by means of “ Detail” ) k) Click on “ OK” 4.3. The Alarm Type (communication alarm.. 4. Profile “No Remote Alarms” shows the alarm criterion configuration defined for "path a larms" (only AIS and RDI and Software Download Failure are not alarmed). The default presented profiles is: • • Profile “No alarms” . This ASAP enables the emission of all: Communication Alarms (i. Passing on and copying of this document.e. SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed) Equipment alarms Environmental Error Processing (i. the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed) Equipment alarms Environmental Error Processing (i. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.e.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 44/399 . This ASAP inhibits the emission of any potential alarm. This ASAP enables the emission of all: Communication Alarms (i. ASAPs Management dialogue box. Whit this profiles all the alarms are enabled (only Software Download Failure is not alarmed). the AIS. Software Download Failure is not alarmed) • Profile “Primary alarms” with this profile the AIS. Figure 11.e.e.e. This ASAP enables the emission of all alarms. SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed. Software Download Failure.All rights reserved. Software Download Failure is not alarmed) • Profile “All Alarms” (i. Battery Degraded. all alarms disabled). Passing on and copying of this document. You can select an ASAP. Battery Failure. selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone button. NOTE: if this profile is not already present in the list. ASAP Edition dialogue box.“ Primary alarms” . Path Trace Mismatch are not alarmed). it is necessary to create it. Communication Subsystem Failure. For ASAP "10001" it is then possible to choose Detail. For ASAP “ No Alarms” .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 45/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• The user can set profile 10001. Modify.“ No Remote Alarms”and “ All Alarms”it is only possible to choose Detail. Clone or Delete buttons. the ASAP edition dialogue box is displayed. ED 01 SC. Modify. All rights reserved. Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP. or Clone buttons. Click on Detail. A default standard configuration is set. Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator. Figure 12. or Clone button. (Battery Degraded. To take into account a profile modification. N. The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. NOTE: it is necessary to choose one or more of these filters to have the list. The Probable cause family checks buttons allows filtering the probable causes that will appear in the Probable cause name list. Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause). "Major". To find a particular probable cause. When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isn't possible to modify..2 Set Alarm Severities To assign an alarm severity to a TP or equipment. and then Non Service Affecting (protected probable cause) and then Service Independent (don't used.The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable causes and a list of alarm severity. it is not operative). All rights reserved. When you have finished configuring ASAP. The ASAP function only enables the modification of the severities assigned to the probable causes. select the probable cause whose severity level you wish to modify.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 46/399 . For each the severity can be chosen from "Critical". The Set ASAP dialog opens. 4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The max number o f ASAP is six. it is mandatory to perform a resynchronization of the alarms. removal or modification of these severities and causes. ED 01 SC. During this re-synchronization.3. To do this. option from the Configuration pull down menu. "Warning". it does not allow the addition. When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002.B. You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause. N..). A "Non-alarm" probable cause corresponds to no alarm emitted for this probable cause. ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned severities. enter its name in the Search entry box at the bottom. press the OK button to confirm the settings and close the dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new settings and close the dialogue box.2. Passing on and copying of this document.B. the severities are updated only when the NE emits the modified or new alarms. the severity of each alarm is updated. "Non-alarmed" or "Not used". select the TP or equipment in the related view and then select the Set Alarm Severities. "Minor". Otherwise. its progress is shown in the section "Execution Monitoring".All rights reserved. Within the "Apply to" section on the right side. Passing on and copying of this document. Since this application process takes some time.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 47/399 . Figure 13. • Network element The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP". This is the default if no object is selected in the view. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Set ASAP dialogue box. the user specifies the objects (TP or equipment) the ASAP selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied to: Choose Scope • Selected object only The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the view This is the default if an object is selected in the view. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment a nd close the dialog.B. All rights reserved. Since this application process takes some time. AU-4CTPs are no subordinates of MSTTPs. Choose Class (es) Enabled if one the scopes "Network Element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is selected. if the AU-4 CTP should be included as subordinate. Execution Monitoring Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application process if one of the scopes "Network element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is chosen.• Selected object and subordinates The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of this subordinates matching the criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP". Press Close to close the dialog and discard any changes. • • All classes (es) Specific class (es) Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to. 4. Therefore. BKF. SHD and ABF) are managed. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. which are currently assigned to the ASAP. N. select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP (EIS) as main object.3.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 48/399 . ED 01 SC. Choose current ASAP The new ASAP is only applied to objects.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities Selecting the Set SdhNE Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down menu only the alarms at Equipment level (FF. Due to system architecture. its progress is shown in the Section "Execution Monitoring". To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited. 4. select the Supervision pull down menu. ED 01 SC.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm notifications. Figure 14. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog. its ASAP is highlighted in the list. the labels of the alarm panel are grey out. You can then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. a) To inhibit alarm notification. Using the Detail button or double-clicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed information on this ASAP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Press Close the dialog and discard any changes.3. Figure 15.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 49/399 . Inhibit alarm notification From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. B. Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT but alarms are still generated by the NE.5 Alarms re— synchronization The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to update the current problem list of the NE. You can then select the Allow Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.3. 4. Figure 17. N. Figure 16.6 Alarms persistency Configuration ED 01 SC. After this operation CT and NE current alarms are consistent. select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.N.B. Alarm re--synchronization From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. b) To allow alarm notification Select the Supervision pull down menu. Allow alarm notifications From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. Never use this operation during a correct behavior. This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. Passing on and copying of this document. 4.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 50/399 . All rights reserved.3. To re--sync hronize the alarms. The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version. The following dialogue box is opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 51/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Figure 20. Alarm persistency Time Configuration 4.All rights reserved. Figure 18.4 Restart NE The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. Restart NE confirmation Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE. Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarms persistency Configuration Menu option Figure 19. SY.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 52/399 . • NE Domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. having in charge the NE. the Manager misses the NE connection). The Manager List contains the list of managers (i. The different domains could be assigned to different operators. Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu.1 Set Manager list This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the NE. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. All rights reserved. RM. NPOS.e. Figure 21. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. The dialog-box contains the following fields: • Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list. Passing on and copying of this document. EML) that work on the NE. Set Manager list 5.5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the Security management: 5.e. Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i. assigning it to the NE. OK button is used to validate the selection.2 Set ACD level ED 01 SC. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 53/399 . RM and EML). Set ACD level ED 01 SC. If it is changed. The dialog-box contains the following fields: All rights reserved. it is necessary to restart the EMLUSM.e. • The Access Control Domain check level Permit to set one of two level checks. By the way. This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager. OK button is used to validate the selection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers (i. Figure 22. Passing on and copying of this document. • Current ACD level Show the Access Control Domain level currently set. Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu. the ACD is performed on all the NEs No Check. the ACD is not managed The default value is NE level. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain. this is an operation that should be performed only during the EML-USM installation phase: • • NE level. 6.Configuring input and output external points.1 Displaying external points Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu. -. An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Expanding or reducing external points list. -. Passing on and copying of this document. a flood. relay) connected to detector.. Figure 23.e. An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping alarm).6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT All rights reserved. which is monitored by the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 54/399 . Opening the external points view After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the current window instead of the current view. ED 01 SC. Number of relays on the NE is dedicated to check modification of the environment as for example a fire. This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). An external output point is independent from external input point.Displaying external points. It corresponds to an external event. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: -. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 55/399 . The user label: a user-friendly label associated to the configurable external point (see further the paragraph External points configuration). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. The following information is given for each external point: • • The external point type: Input or Output. Figure 24. External points view The external points view displays a list of all input and output points. Configuring external points. a little flag is represented near the status of the concerned point. If the external point is active (On). Passing on and copying of this document. 6. Expanding or reducing the external points list. Figure 25. Only for the “ Output”external point there is the following information: • The Output criteria: if configured. ED 01 SC. The following dialogue box is then opened. else "Off". And then select the Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.• The external state : represents the alarm state. displaying information about the selected external point (Input or Output).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 56/399 . display the alarm event and the board effected associated to the Output point (see further the paragraph External points configuration) All rights reserved. To see either the input points. select the appropriate option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure. click on the concerned row. Can be set for output points (ON or OFF) "Output criteria" associated to the External output point To configure an external point. the output points or all the external points. Figure 26.1. 6.2 External points configuration The configuration operations available on external points are: • • • "User labels" configuration "External state". "On" when the alarm is raised. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Expanding or reducing external points list The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can also be restricted to the input or to the output points. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ED 01 SC. External input point configuration dialogue box Figure 28.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 57/399 . Figure 27.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. For example the output contact could be used to "Manually" activate a pump drain water from the room where the equipment is placed. Figure 29. where the event is chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS. Passing on and copying of this document. RDI and LOF) a nd specifies the l l l l l ED 01 SC. 1) External Input Point Configuration l l l User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the associated event that must be taken under check (for example presences of water of fire in the room where the Equipment is placed) External State: this field is set to off and can't be changed by the operator Probable Cause: the field is set to housekeeping and can't be changed by the operator 2) External Output Point Configuration l User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the alarm detected or the action that must be executed if a specific event occur (for example a "Pump" activation when water is present in the room where the equipment is placed. Output Criteria can be configured as: Manual (forced). External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown. in this case is also necessary to set the option "On" in the field "External State".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 58/399 . Flexible. The output contact is set in a fixed way. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#. External State: can be set to "on" (alarm) or "off" (non alarm) only if "Manual" option has been selected in the "Output Criteria" field. not depending on a particular event.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. When the configuration of the external point is completed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 59/399 . Passing on and copying of this document.STM-N interface which the Output Criteria refers to by clicking on Choose button. The Cance l push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. subsequently the TP search dialog box will be opened. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Board views and Port views). The different types of alarms.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 60/399 . Thus. their number and their severity level. laser forced on etc.1 Alarms surveillance In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the NE. Passing on and copying of this document. Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section. are represented in all Equipment views (NE views. At the end the Event log access is introduced. Alarms are always present on the operator's workspace.). which change color when the relevant alarm is active. An icon representation is used. It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report. you know the number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment. You can then select the following option from the Alarms pull down menu: • NE Alarms: all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which is activated Object Alarms: only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm Surveillance Report Subtrees Alarm: only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant subtrees are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Equipment Alarms: only the ala rms of the equipment management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report External Points Alarms : only the alarms of the input external point management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report • • • • • ED 01 SC. Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the following paragraph. Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. at all times.7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT All rights reserved. 7. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Than is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operator's command such us loop. Alarm Surveillance Selecting any of the previously seen options.Figure 30. then a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sublist). the Alarm surveillance report is displayed as for the example of the following figure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 61/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarm Surveillance ED 01 SC. Figure 31. All rights reserved. This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of all alarms. Passing on and copying of this document. The information supplied helps the operator. the alarm type. Example of abnormal condition list The abnormal conditions are the following: ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 32. Select Diagnosis->Abnormal Condition List. Abnormal condition menu option Figure 33. presented in next section.Detailed information for each alarm is supplied. 7. For example the board in which the alarm is detected. Detailed description is given in the AS Operator's Handbook. the probable cause. (Maintena nce section.2 Abnormal Condition List The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE "not normal conditions" listing the events that contribute to abnormal condition. typically during troubleshooting operation. where more details about alarms is given). the status of the alarm. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 62/399 . Figure below is opened.• • • • Loopback ALS is disable and the laser is forced on or off Protection units (in case of EPS. ED 01 SC. SNCP and MSP if supported) are in lockout or in forced status Board (or sub-board) is placed in a not configured slot Select an abnormal condition and click on “ OK ”to open the relative dialog window. the diagnostic associated to the hardware failure. at the user interface level.3 Internal Link Monitor This function improves. All rights reserved. Example of loopback dialog window management The other abnormal condition types will open the corresponding management window or will open the window to navigate towards the management window. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 34.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 63/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 7. The left side of the page displays the block representing the MATRIX board. In detail.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 64/399 . In order to indicate all the possible roots of the "link failure". Two arrows are displayed between the MATRIX block and each board block. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. The right side of the page displays the list of blocks representing the equipped boards. each page contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • • • • The tab of the page displays the user label of the MATRIX board.The presence of a failure on RX or TX side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active MATRIX is detected. the second one concern the spare MATRIX. the two arrows represent the link status in RX and TX side: A red arrow indicates a "link failure" A green arrow indicates a "working link" • The Refresh button allows performing an explicit refresh of all the displayed information. for the active and stand-by MATRIX is shown. As shown in Figure below. The first page displays the link status for the main MATRIX. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. each block displays a string contained the user label of the associated board. All rights reserved. Internal Link Monitor displays a detailed localization of the link failure: a graphical representation of all NGI link status. A red block represents the MATRIX if a link problem is detected in one of the NGI Tx from one of the possible "port" board. Select the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. all boards that detect the link failure are represented by a red block in the page of the MATRIX main: • • a”port" board in represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in the NGI Rx from the active MATRIX. select the Log Browsing option.All rights reserved. perform the following operations to have access to the Event Log file: In the Diagnosis pull-down menu. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view The Proposed option: • Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1) to access the Event Log file.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 65/399 . Figure 35. Figure 36. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.4 Log Browsing From the Network Element context views. Internal Link Monitor 7. 5. previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervision" menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 66/399 . Remote Inventory confirmation request Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented. View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Upload remote Inventory This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. permitting to analyze all alarms stored in the NE. All rights reserved. The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open. 7. Remote Inventory 7. Refer to the "ELM Operator's Handbook" • Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only. Figure 37. Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu.The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open. permitting to analyze all events stored in the NE. Remote Inventory option of the Equipment. Refer to the "EML Operator's Handbook" • Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2) to access the Event Log file. In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification. construction data etc. ED 01 SC. The options used are: • • Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. A confirmation dialog box is opened.5 This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE. Figure 39. Passing on and copying of this document. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters).Figure 38. The Remote inventory data appears. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Remote Inventory completed 7. All rights reserved. View Remote Inventory Data is displayed in specific fields: • Company It indicates the Company's (Alcatel's branch) which designs the unit.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 67/399 .5. • Unit Type ED 01 SC. Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu.2 View Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the Upload remote inventory. producing the unit.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 68/399 .. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). of the unit's resident software All rights reserved. • Serial Number It indicates the product's serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm. the format must be "YY. The number indicated is that printed on the labels or on the units' front cover plate. • Date identifier It indicates the meaning of the date that follows. When only the year is displayed. TR-ISD-325 • Manufacturing plant It indicates the Company's manufacturing plant id.It indicates the units' acronym • Unit Part Number It indicates Alcatel or Factory product's Part No. It is a two-digit code supplying the following information: 00 date of construction at the time of final testing 01 production order data 02 construction date of the unit lot 03 date products has been forwarded to customer 04 customer order date • Date (YYMMDD) The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. • Software Part Number It indicates the id.. Within the company. • CLEI Code It indicates the CLEI code according to Belle core specs. Passing on and copying of this document." ED 01 SC.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. these nodes will be called adaptive routers. ED 01 SC.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc All rights reserved. RAP and MESA. 8. Passing on and copying of this document. networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains. this sub network should have only a few links to the outside world. L2. there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level 1 sub domain.1 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT Overview on Communication and Routing Domain The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE. all others can be made End Systems For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure below. it is only used to describe L1. Moreover. During the TMN design process. Use of IS -IS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates installation and operation due to the "self learning" capabilities of these protocols and automatic network reconfiguration in case of failure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 69/399 .8 8. a node which have to take routing decisions must became Intermediate Systems. compared with the number of internal links. obviously. moreover the use of these standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a MultiFinder environment. A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing domain follows. it may be useful to divide a adaptive routing domain into smaller routing sub domains. A level 1 sub domain should fulfill the following requirements: • • • A level 1 sub domain should form a connected sub network. Nodes not supporting these protocols. a network is partitioned into domains . called areas or level 1 sub domain .1. IS-IS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a complete consistent picture of the network topology.1 Partitioning into Routing Sub domains In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing.1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 sub domain must become a level 2 intermediate system. level 1 intermediate systems know how to communicate only with IS in the same area. Each node must belong to exactly one level 1 sub domain. the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network. 8. each domain can consist of a collection of two types of nodes: • • Nodes supporting a link state routing protocol IS-IS . these nodes will be called static routers. It is not a network-planning example.1. Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains. there can be some NEs not supporting IS -IS nor ES-IS protocol (static routing). On the other hand. The Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network address NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with witch the prefix is associated. There is a basic rule. within a given level 1 sub domain. It can only be associated with a link of a level 2 intermediate systems. otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other. because there is no exchange of routing information between the domains.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 70/399 . whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. consider network. Therefore normally RAP and MESA shall never be used. ED 01 SC. processing and traffic overhead. The major benefits of this partitioning are reduction of memory. This network will be called level 2 backbones. All rights reserved.1. 8. Within a pure Alcatel network there is no need to use any kind of static routing. the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain the area address "b" and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain the area address "a". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. as a consequence the nodes must belong to the same level 1 sub domain.• Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network. which is split into two separate routing domains: • • Routing domain A resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "a" Routing domain B resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "b" In order to enable the communication. Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP). A Reachable Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as information about a foreign level 1 sub domain within the own domain. the communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End System Adjacencies ( MESA). A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. In the simplest case. because level 1 path cannot be utilized for level 2 communications. Passing on and copying of this document. In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain even if the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel engineers. For example. which must be followed by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a sub domain: there must be at least one area address in common between their two synonymous list. In such condition. A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected nodes must be the same.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate routing domains. where no routing information is exchanged between these domains. all nodes within a level 1 sub domain share the same area address. This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 This feature allows the Element Manager to reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by using IP networking.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP This feature is applicable to NEs equipped with ATM/IP boards. Passing on and copying of this document.1. Hence. OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target. Hence. Routing sub domain organization example 8. and an OSI address. no OSI networking would be required on the external DCN. to communicate IP management messages through an OSI network.1. packets leaving the SH are IP packets. it encapsulates the SNMP messages of the TCP/IP protocol stack over the OSI stack. It permits to create a tunnel over OSI systems.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 71/399 . Figure 40. LAPD. containing the original OSI packet. ECC protocols. OSI packets leaving the SH are encapsulated into IP packets within the SH system itself. In this way the message reaches its final destination 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Once the packet gets the NE through a pure IP network. the GNE has to strip off the IP ED 01 SC. using CLNP. Internet compatibility) in alternative to the full ISO/OSI communication protocols.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 72/399 . the choice is software switchable at NE level. The implementation adopts the RFC1006 standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking. Passing on and copying of this document. No IP packets shall flow inside DCCs. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 8. The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i. extracting the OSI packet. and forwards only the OSI packet on DCCs. Figure below depicts the protocol architecture. in the complete DCN network or at least in a consistent portion of it. All rights reserved. Hence. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. because the GNE receives the IP packet containing the OSI packet. deletes the IP header. the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI. Figure 41.e. and to route the OSI packet as it does today using a pure OSI networking. The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability at the bottom of the QB3/QECC communication protocol suite.encapsulation.2 Communication and routing views ED 01 SC. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 73/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. The options are described in next paragraphs. • ED 01 SC. MESA Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of non IS-IS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE.To access select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull down menu as shown in the following figure. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • OSI Routing Configuration Subdivided in: § RAP Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of NE connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different from the one of the local NE. This information are stored in MESA table. § IP Configuration Subdivided in: § IP Static Routing Configuration: definition of Host/Network destination address for IP static routing § OSPF area Configuration: definition of Open Shortest Path First address § IP Address Config. This information is stored in RAP table. The Communication and Routing Views allows to perform the following operations: • • • Local Configuration: definition of the local NE addresses OS Configuration: addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE NTP Server Configuration: addressing of the main and spare NTP servers connected to the local NE Interface Configuration Subdivided in: § § LAPD Configuration: definition of the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel on the local NE Ethernet Configuration: definition of configuration parameters needed to manage a local NE which provides a LAN Ethernet interface • All rights reserved. Of Point-to Point Interfaces: definition of the Equipment Controller IP address § ISA board IP address : definition of the ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration Subdivided in: § OSI over IP: definition of destination IP address for IP for OSI over tunneling § IP over OSI: definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing for IP over OSI tunneling All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of the menu. as shown in the figure. AFI. depending on the its value. Figure 42. Sel) identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The following fields are present: • a Local Address section contains the following graphical object: § § § § a Presentation Selector (P. Comm/Routing options 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 74/399 . The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the local address of the NE. The presented value must not be modified. o The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP -V2 format of 40 characters long. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and. Selector) identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address.3 Local Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option a nd then from the cascading menu the Local Configuration option. the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: o The value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40 characters). The presented value must not be modified.Sel) identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. Passing on and copying of this document. The presented value must not be modified. a Section Selector (S. ED 01 SC. a Transport Selector (T. o The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long. The first field of the NSAP address. determines the NSAP format.All rights reserved. System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a "intermediate system level 1" or as a "intermediate system level 2" or as a "End System". of the mandatory address and of the synonymous addresses must be the same. the last two fields. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 75/399 . ED 01 SC. End System is not operative. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and if they are inserted. level 2.In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: o System Id : uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. Note that a level 2 intermediate systems performs functions of a level 1 too. System Id and Network Selector. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it. Passing on and copying of this document. o Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d"). the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any pre-formatting because of the variable format: All rights reserved. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address. o a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field o a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address • • Synonymous Area Addresses section allows having multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain. In the view. inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 76/399 . Local Configuration 8. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the OS Configuration option. Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. The following fields are present: • • Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. Figure 43. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.4 OS Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu.All rights reserved. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs connected to the local NE. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 77/399 . The following fields are present: • • • Enabling NTP Protocol section allows enabling or disabling the NTP Protocol. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the NTP Server Configuration option. the same NSAP address of the OS must be assigned. If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware). Figure 44.5 NTP Server Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. used for time distribution in the network. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. OS Configuration 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP (Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 78/399 .The LAPD role that contains one of the following value: • User • Network • Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD table.This section contains the following graphical objects: • The number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List. • To create a new LAPD Interface . • The LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces. The "LAPD Configuration" dialog opens (this example has one LAPD Interface configured). NTP Server Configuration 8. Passing on and copying of this document. for each LAPD Interfaces. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interface Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration option. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. ED 01 SC.The user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface (MS/RS TTP). • To delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List. the table displays: .6 LAPD Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. It contains the following functional block and graphical objects: . All rights reserved.A section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user: • To display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table. • To change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List. Figure 45. . the other one connected must be configured with Network role. this buttons can be used to refresh the LAPD table too. the section contains the following graphical objects: • The field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPD's to be displayed in the LAPD Table. Named Create LAPD Interface. • Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface. the message "No LAPD Interface" will be displayed near LAPD Interface counter (that it is at zero) • All rights reserved. it is disabled when the maximum number of LAPD Interface has been configured. the value "Ignore" will allow to display all the LAPD types. the TP Search dialog will be configured in order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD Interface. If no LAPD Interface is configured in the equipment. This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • A Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior TTP of the LAPD Interface to be created. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 79/399 . This connection is a must to establish connection between two NE's: if one is configured with User role. ED 01 SC. • A section LAPD Role that allows configuring the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface to be created. this button starts the TP Search dialog. the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC type.a section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPD's of the selected type in the LAPD Table. Passing on and copying of this document. .Change Role button that allows too change the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface selected in the table. The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP notification. this button starts a new dialog. • The Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type. Figure 46. Creation LAPD Interface ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Figure 47.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 80/399 . LAPD Configuration dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Passing on and copying of this document. Apply button performs a configuration change of the data. Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) o L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field. Note that the flag shall be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs) of the same area of the relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 81/399 . MAC Address section allows displaying the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN. If “ OSPF”or “ Both”options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected.7 Ethernet Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. IP Mask and the Routing IP Protocol used. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. o L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field.Figure 48. The following fields and data are present: • • • Ethernet Interface field allows defining or removing a Local Area Network Port for the access to the Data Communication Network. it is a read-only field. OSI Section: o L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2 traffic only. Confirmation to change LAPD Role All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. 8. thus avoiding transmitting L1 packets. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interfaces Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet Configuration option. which provide a LAN Ethernet interface. Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) • IP Section allows to define the “ node”IP Address. also the “ Associated OSPF Area”must be set. The dialog-box opens (figure below) and allows defining the parameters needed to manage a NE. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 82/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. Ethernet Configuration 01 SC.All rights reserved. ED Figure 49. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 83/399 . the LAN port will be used. Passing on and copying of this document. If the addressed element is the OS. Delete button is used to delete the selected page.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. each page contains the following data: • • • Physical Interface button o If the element is empty. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. displays the selected port and allows to change it. Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate domain. New button is used to insert a new page. In detail.All rights reserved. Figure 50. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view. MAC Address section allows addressing the element of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Reachable Address Prefix table. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration option. The Area Address Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System Id and Network Selector. Ethernet Configuration -. each page represents a particular element of the RAP table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. ED 01 SC. the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits.L2 only parameter 8. The view simulates a real notebook. the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain. displays the "none" value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the addressed area. o If the element isn't empty. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Manual ES Adjacencies table.Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Passing on and copying of this document. each page contains the following data: • Physical Interface button o If the element is empty. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration option. which will be used to reach the End System element. the LAN port will be used. If the addressed element is the OS. In detail. the ES element must be in the same area as the one of the local NE. RAP Configuration 8. Figure 51. All rights reserved.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. displays the "none" value and allows selecting a LAPD ports or a LAN port.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 84/399 ED . Each element of the MESA table allows linking a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a End System element. 01 SC. The view simulates a real notebook. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device. each page represents a particular element of the MESA table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.• • o If the element isn't empty. the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 85/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. New button is used to insert a new page. System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element. All rights reserved. MESA Configuration 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.10 IP Configuration The options listed in the menu Configuration –> Comm/Routing –> IP Configuration and also in Configuration –> Comm/Routing –> Tunneling Configuration is relevant to the configuration of messages communications for the management of ATM or IP boards (ISA) inside the equipment and in the network. Figure 52. MAC Address section allows addressing the element in the Ethernet LAN. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table and close the view. displays the selected port and allows changing it. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. by means of the options: – “IP Static Routing Configuratio n”if using static routing – “OSPF Area Configuratio n”if using the automatic OSPF routing All rights reserved. if equipped with ATM/IP boards. when an OSI management message passes through an IP network. NOT E: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel.1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management In order to manage the ATM/IP boards inserted into the equipment. • “OSI over IP Tunnelin g”it defines the IP address of the destination node to be reached (for instance the IP router where the TMN is connected). it is to be defined for every ISA board hosted by the equipment. it is to be done for every SDH–NE of the network. so that they can see each other. allows defining the IP Address IP Mask to reach a network. 8. • “ISA Board IP Address”it defines the IP address for the ATM or IP boards (ISA). The dialog box opens and allows configuring the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration.10.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 86/399 . This should be the first addressing operation • Routing configuration.e. the following operations are to be done: • “IP Address Configuration of Point–to–Point Interface”defines the IP address for the Equipment–Controller (EC). The following fields and data are present: [1] Destination Host IP Address: allows defining the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host [2] Destination Network: it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address. where the QB3 is connected to a LAN/IP network. [3] Default Gateway IP Address: allows defining the address of the next hop gateway ED 01 SC.11 IP Static Routing Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. It is to be defined on a a Gateway Network Element (GNE) equipped with the QB3 interface. NOT E: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel. when the ATM/IP management message passes through an SDH/OSI network. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.8. they must have the same address) • “IP over OSI Tunnelin g”it defines the OSI address (NSAP) of the destination node to be reached (for instance the GNE connected to the TMN). NOT E: if the ISA boards are in EPS 1+1 configuration. so that they can see each other. the IP Static Routing Configuration option. i. N. New button is used to insert a new page. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 87/399 .[4] CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a pre-define IP over OSI tunnel to towards a gateway. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B. Points from [3] to [5] are alternative Apply button is used to perform a configure change of the data contained in the column of the table and close the view. [5] IP Point-to-Point Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by EC. Figure 53. IP Static Routing Configuration 8. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. The following fields and data are present: • • OSPF Area IP Address OSPF Area Range Mask Both fields gives a synthetically information that includes all the addresses (specific a NE and to a Network) in an Area. Figure 54. New button is used to insert a new page.12 OSPF Area Table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. OSPF Area Table Configuration ED 01 SC. The dialog-box opens and allows configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration. the OSPF Area Table Configuration option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 88/399 . All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the IP Address of the ISA Board that communicate with the Equipment Controller (EC). OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it.13 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces Select the Configuration pull down menu. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it. IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces 8. the ISA Board IP Address option.8. ED 01 SC. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the Equipment Controller IP address used to communicate with the ISA board. All rights reserved. the IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 89/399 . Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.14 ISA board IP Address Select the Configuration pull down menu. Figure 55. the OSI over IP option. Figure 57.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 90/399 . Select the Comm/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration ED 01 SC. Figure 56.All rights reserved.15 OSI over IP Select the Configuration pull down menu. ISA Board IP Address 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. The dialog-box opens (Figure below) and allows configuring the Remote Destination IP Address of the Equipment Controller. The AFI field is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and. The following fields are present: • All rights reserved. The first field of the NSAP address. Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d") In the view. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. level 2. AFI determines the NSAP format. depending on the its value.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 91/399 . New button is used to insert a new page. Destination NAPS Address: A Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. ED 01 SC.16 IP over OSI Select the Configuration pull down menu. the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: • • The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP -V2 format of 40 characters long In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: • • System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. Passing on and copying of this document. the IP over OSI option. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Destination NAPS Address and the IP Routing Type. inserted in the NE or the operator might select it.Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view. 8. the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any pre-formatting because of the variable format: • • A first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field A second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address • IP Routing: allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows. Select the Coo/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address. All rights reserved. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. also the "Associated OSPF Area" must be set. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. IP over OS ED 01 SC.• • • • OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) RIP (Routing Information Protocol) Both None If "OSPF" or "Both" options are selected. Figure 58. Passing on and copying of this document. New button is used to insert a new page Delete button is used to delete the selected page Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 92/399 . the Equipment level view is presented. It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard. Passing on and copying of this document. Further. by double clicking on a port body contained in the board.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 93/399 . Further. the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. two subrack are presented: • • At the top the 1662SMC Subrack. the Rack level view is presented. It is also possible to: • • Go back to the previous view. ED 01 SC. Using the menu options.1 Equipment Management Introduction and navigation All rights reserved. by selecting the Forward option from the view menu N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. select the Equipment option from the View pull down menu The first level of the "Equipment Overview" representation will be displayed directly into the current window The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy.9 9. The NE hierarchy is organized in the following way: subrack > board > port > TP Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • • • • The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view.B. the Equipment level view is presented. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. by double clicking on a board body. This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. The port view displays the inner TPs. In the Rack level view. named SR62C At the bottom the Fans Subrack. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. further. by selecting the Backward option from the views menu Go to the next view. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view (subrack level) The Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. named SRFAN The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack Further. Equipment Overview -. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 59.Subracks level 3AL 98168 ADAA 94/399 .All rights reserved. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 60. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.Rack level (without Fans subrack) 3AL 98168 ADAA 95/399 . Equipment Overview -. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Equipment Overview. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 61.Rack level (with Fans subrack) 3AL 98168 ADAA 96/399 . Set and change the boards present on the Equipment is the main function. Details about these alarms indication are given in the Maintenance section.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Board administrative state that decides on the "in/out of service" of the board is also described.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 97/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs. Alarms indications are present at every NE level. Figure 62. Equipment Overview .NE level In the Subrack view it is possible use the options offered by the Equipment menu clicking on it in the menu bar. Passing on and copying of this document. 2 The boards can be set.All rights reserved. or on an existing Out of Service board in order to change it. changed or removed using the menu options of the Equipment view. a ) Setting or changing a board/subrack A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an existing Out of Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). Select the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The contour becomes highlighted to show that operations can be done on it. • • • Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 98/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. Equipment menu Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences: . The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types of boards/subrack is displayed. In fact. ED 01 SC.Configuration of a new board • Configure the board using the option "Set" - Change of board type • • "Set out of service" the board Configure the board using the option "Set" - Remove a board • • "Set out of service" the board "Remove" the board Set and change or remove board/subrack 9. Figure 63. the Set option is available only after selecting an empty slot or an Out-of-service board. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 99/399 .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The name of the board is highlighted. • • • • • • Click on the optical module to replace. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot has been selected. Click on OK push button to validate the choice. It is possible remove a board only if it is not involved in any type of cross connection (OH bytes included) or Performance monitoring. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Remove" operation.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 100/399 ED . This procedure can be done to replace an existing optical module with another of different type without previously remove it. A lock representation appears over the boards ("in-service") • In the Create/Modify dialogue box.B. A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is displayed. The board representation appears on the N. • Choose the board/subrack type required. which the equipment may accept in the selected slot.E. A padlock representation appears over the board. b) Removing a board/subrack • Click on the board/subrack to remove. • All rights reserved. The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when the board change is effective. 01 SC. N. view in the slot when the board change is effective.Figure 64. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted.B. • • • If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the slot. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted to show that operation can be done on it. Select the Remove option the Equipment pull down menu. Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) N. c) Modify a board N. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context. the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box.B. the name of the module is highlighted. For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical composition please refers to the Technical Handbook. Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. The list of boards/subrack displayed during a "Set Board" operation is restricted to those. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice. 9. Connect FAN to CONGI It is possible to disable this function by selecting the relevant CONGI board and than choosing the Remove Fan connection from CONGI#10 option of the Equipment menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 101/399 . All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Shows an example Select the CONGI board To enable this function select the Connect Fan to CONGI#10 option (or as alternative Connect Fan to CONGI#12) of the Equipment menu if the supervision Fan Subrack cable is connected to CONGI unit inserted in slot 10. Figure below.3 Connect Fan to CONGI board This command enable the Fan Subrack alarms management from CONGI in slot 10 or slot 12 according to the option selected in the Equipment menu. Figure 65. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. A lock representation appears over the boards.1 Setting a board in service • • In the Subrack NE view. Figure 66. Remove FAN connection from CONGI 9. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 102/399 . a lock representation appears over the boards which are in "in service" state.4. if the NE allows it. 9. Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. click on the board in order to select it. N.All rights reserved.B. In the equipment view.4 Board administrative state The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state The board's administrative ("in service" or "out of service") state is indicated on the board view as shown in the following figure. Consulting a board’ s administrative state 9.5 Software description This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s) which is (are) present in the selected board. Figure 67. A lock representation disappears.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 103/399 . click on the board in order to select it.4.4.9.2 Setting a board out of service • • In the Subrack NE view. 9. substituted by the symbol over the boards. Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu. Select the Ok push button in the confirmation window that appears.. 6 Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and Boards. Passing on and copying of this document. Two options are available: • • Subrack level: prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the subrack. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 104/399 . Board level: show the remote inventory data of the selected board For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure below. ED 01 SC. Software Description dialogue box. • Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu. Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu. Figure 68. All rights reserved.• • Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (EQUICO or MATRIX unit). Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box. 9. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Appear. Opened dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there is software in the selected board. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. ED 01 SC. Figure 69. If no printer is installed. Remote Inventory The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format. Select Printer N. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 105/399 . Figure 70. there is no error message displayed to indicate this. Passing on and copying of this document.7 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to navigate to the equipment that supports the selected board. Select Output Format for file 9.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 106/399 . Figure 71.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Subrack level 3AL 98168 ADAA 107/399 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 72. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. Equipment Overview -. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.10 Board view 10. This information are "In/Out of service" of the board (Administrative State) and board alarms and status like "missing" (RUM) or "mismatch" (RUTM).1 Introduction The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port view. ED 01 SC. The "Board view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu. An example of "board view" with the presented port is in Figure 72. In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given. Passing on and copying of this document. Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom of the view. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 108/399 . In case of board with multi access SDH another view permits to select the SDH port. presenting the ports. as indicated in the example (Administrative State and Board Alarms/Status). then double clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board view. EPS condition if supported and other indications typical of each unit. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board 3AL 98168 ADAA 109/399 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 73.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. one example of optical port) (SDH) (ATM or IP) (PDH) (GBit ETHERNET) Figure 75. Example of a Board View A port type is described with a board rectangular view and port identification.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 110/399 . The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure below. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis The following information is available: ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 74. it is also possible open the corresponding port view.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 111/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 76.1 Port Access Click on Port Access menu option of the Board menu to access the "Port View" Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set the relevant configurations. By double clicking on a board view. 10. The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination. ED 01 SC. ISA Port Configuration: It allows configuring the TPs for the ATM connections. The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms. Board menu options These options are described in next paragraphs. Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. • • • Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi-mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switchable). A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the alarms name.• • • Type of port (name) State of port (alarm status synthesis) Symbol of the port The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each port. 10. Note: this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained in the view. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. All rights reserved.2 Board View Menu Selecting the " Board" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Board menu is presented: • Port Access: Access the "Port" view.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 77.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 112/399 . After “ Port Access”selection (example) 10. Change Physical Interface The following dialog box is opened: ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.e. it changes the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI Select the Symbol of the port in the "Board view". Figure 78. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.2 Change Physical Interface This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bi-mode port (140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s switchable port) i.2. Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu. Figure 79.3 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate to the subrack that supports the selected port view. 10. Subrack level ED 01 SC.Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface. Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 113/399 . PDH. VC3 TTP. HOA. TUG2. the Termination Point. Trail Monitoring (only with enabled POM) • ATM port: VC4C TTP.e. ED 01 SC. modification and configuration of each port. The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu then double clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack view. and the available menu permits to configure the port. AU4 CTP. selecting a VC or TU TP. TU12. En CTP. VC4 TTP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Introduction This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation. which appears.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 114/399 . The HOA port view can only be reached from the Transmission view. The menu differs according the port type (SDH. VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP • Fast ETHERNET port: MAU. (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). the corresponding port view is opened. By double clicking on a board view. VC12XV. Passing on and copying of this document. VC4 TTP. Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a TP. TP) referred to the specific Port. PTC. it permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port. VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP • Gigabit ETHERNET port: MAU.11 Port view 11. as described in chapter "Show supporting equipment" Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available presenting the ports. VC4XV. s31 TTP and E1 TTP • PR_EA port: VC4 TTP. Trail Monitor (only with enabled POM) • PDH port: PPI TTP. On the transmission view. The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i. TU3. The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views. VCn TTP • HOA port: VC4 TTP. VC12 TTP. RS TTP. prot TTP (MSP TTP). The port types contain the following TP: • SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP. select the TP and on the Transmission menu select the Navigate to a port view option. In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. The ATM/IP/ETH TPs are not automatically created when the board is inserted in the subrack but must be created as explained in chapter ATM/IP/ETH Configuration From the Port view It is possible to Navigate to Transmission view. VC4 TTP. ATM/IP/ETH). VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP All rights reserved. PTC. TUG3. VC3XV. The "Port view" is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. Figure 80.2 Port View: elements on the TP The symbols of the TPs have the following meaning: • Alarm Icon Area ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 115/399 . Example of a SDH Port View On the port view.All rights reserved. the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message boxes provide more information concerning the type and the alarms of the port. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. On the other hand the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about MSP protection and ALS state (if they are supported). 11. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. Figure 81. so port menu refers to the selected TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. an icon with a x appears beneath the box. • TP Role The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. The color of the boxes changes according to the alarm severity. • Performance State If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring. Termination or Compound Adaptation and Termination. an icon with a P appears beneath the box. • All rights reserved. Cross-connected state If the condition of the resource is cross-connected.The icon boxes represent alarms. Termination TP box. an icon with a L appears beneath the box • Selected state An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 116/399 . • Loop state If the condition of the resource is under loop. HOA and ATM). ED 01 SC. Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the port. PDH.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 117/399 . Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow. • • • • • • • • • • • • • TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter TP Frame Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G. Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. The menu differs according the port type (SDH. opening all TP's Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring operation (POM. Figure 82. G. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. and is introduced in the following: • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace overhead on Synchronous TP's. 11. Monitoring Operations: Set parameters for POM/SUT and TC (Tandem Connection) TPs. Passing on and copying of this document. Loopback: Manage the loopback commands.3 Port View Menu Selecting the " Port" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Port menu is presented. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Performance: See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Not applicable to HOA port. Not available for PDH port.783 Adaptation TP box. It is described in this chapter. It is described in the following paragraph. TC) all TP's. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths.All rights reserved. for commissioning or maintenance purposes MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. SUT.704 or ISDN-PRA management. Set Retiming: Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal. Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view. When the Retiming feature is disabling.4 Set Retiming The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is absorb the jitter / wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occur. Set Retiming enable (before) As result of this operation the sta te information color become green and the label "Retiming State Enable" is written ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 118/399 . Figure 84. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 83. Examples of port menu options (SDH. The feature is set individually per port.All rights reserved. PDH and ATM port) 11. Select the Set Retiming->Enable option from the Port menu. Passing on and copying of this document. the color of the state information at the bottom of the window is brown and the label "Retiming State Disable" is written. Figure 85. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5 AU4 Concatenation Select a STM-16 or STM-4 optical interface to configure as AU4 concatenation structure. Therefore for concatenated action of for AU4s in one AU4c these AU4 streams are deleted and substituted by the new AU4c component. Passing on and copying of this document. AU4#9. Click on the Cancel key to exit and come back to the previous window.All rights reserved. (In this example a STM-16 view is shown) The STM-16 stream appears divided into different groups: not all AU4s can be chosen as first AU4 but only AU4#1 AU4#5. Zoom in to open the board and then the port view menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 119/399 . Select the AU4 Concatenation option from the Port menu to open Figure below. AU4#13 for AU4c. ED 01 SC. Set Retiming enable (after) 11. Select the supported concatenation Number =4 (selection 64 is not operative) to visualize the available group/groups then select the group to concatenate and click on the Concatenate push button. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. vice versa when is selected a concatenated AU4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 86. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands The Concatenate button will be enabled and the Deconcatenate button will be disabled when is selected a non concatenated AU4.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 120/399 . All rights reserved. The AU4c appears as a single icon that has the same size of the actual AU4 blocks.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 121/399 . Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view The port view represented in Figure up. Passing on and copying of this document. The AU4c streams support the Alarm synthesis. Figure 87. Shows an STM4 interface with four AU4 concatenated in one AU4c. ED 01 SC. To deconcatenate an AU4c select again the "AU4 Concatenation" option in the Port View menu and then select the AU4c to deconcatenate. Click on the Deconcatenate push button to apply the command or on Cancel to exit. Cross-Connection states and Performance Monitoring information as standard AU4 streams. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Line Length Configuration. The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu. Example of a concatenated AU4c 11.LAPD Configuration .HDSL Configuration. .Ms Configuration • PDH port: .Tx Quality Configuration .ALS Management . .NT G703/704 Configuration. Figure 88. It opens a menu that differs according the port type: • SDH port: . Not operative ED 01 SC.Single Fiber Configuration .Show Optical Configuration . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 122/399 . Not operative . Passing on and copying of this document.6 Physical Media option menu The Port -> Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP of the port.All rights reserved. ATM/IP/ETH Configuration .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 123/399 .1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration The aim of this paragraph is to describe the optical port hence the laser sources. Not operative . Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is useful in case of a loss of communication between two NEs due to optical fiber breakdown. . Not operative . Passing on and copying of this document. . . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The automatic laser shutdown function can only be configured from the optical ports of the equipment.Control Path Activation. These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced. Figure 89. The Automatic Laser Shutdown State dialogue box opens.6. Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the ALS Management option. For safety reasons it may be necessary to shutdown the laser to enable the fixing of the communication link. Select the SPI block in the port view and then select the Port pull down menu.Ethernet Port Configuration All rights reserved..Ethernet Mapping Protocol.Remote Laser Management.NT X21 Configuration. Physical media menu (SDH port example) 11.ALS Management. ED 01 SC. Not operative • ETHERNET port: . select the Laser Forced ON option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue. ED 01 SC. b) Forcing the Laser to start or stop. To allow the automatic laser shutdown functionality. When the laser is forced to ON or OFF. Passing on and copying of this document. if it was not already so. Figure 90. select the ALS Enabled option of the ALS Function: option button. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 1) Force laser ON. To carry out a laser forced ON. it is restarted or stopped and the Automatic Laser Shutdown is disabled. 2) Force laser OFF.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 124/399 . Automatic Laser Shutdown Management The dialogue box enables the ALS Management and the Restart parameters. The following actions are available a) Allow Automatic Laser Shutdown. in periodic mode. The test restart is similar to the manual restart but the laser remains "ON" for a longer time in order to make a measurement of the received optical power. returning to the state. To enable (disable) an automatic laser restart following an automatic laser shutdown (periodic restart). e) Wait to restart time The Wait To Restart Time: field indicating the delay period in seconds.To carry out a laser forced OFF. occurring before an automatic laser restart is launched (following an automatic shutdown). the manual restart permits to permits to perform a laser restart for single time period. f) ALS Manual restart When the ALS Manual Restart is Enabling it is possible to enter two different commands: Manual or Test Restart. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The laser will be ON for 2 secs and OFF for 70 secs. ED 01 SC. The restart time period for this equipment is fixed to 70 secs. The same procedure is applicable for the ALS Manual restart: while the ALS auto Restart is disabled. Passing on and copying of this document. select the Laser Forced OFF option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue c) Delete: this option deactivates the ALS function.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 125/399 . Figure 91. select the Enabled (Disabled) option of the ALS Auto Restart. The manual command immediately activates a single laser restart: this command overrides the wait to restart time. From this window it is only possible to create the ALS function (all ALS commands are grey) All rights reserved. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) d) Enabling or Disabling Automatic / Manual Laser Restart. Active = The ALS has been activated (On). Passing on and copying of this document. Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block.B. are: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. displayed by the functional state message area of the optical port. In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated. ALS and Laser current state (example) 11. Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). ED 01 SC. then click on Show Optical Configuration option from the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the parameters of the selected optical port. Figure 92. ALS states (see example of). Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.2 Show Optical Configuration This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of the port that is visualized. Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. select the Apply button to confirm the setting and close the dialogue box. Selecting only the Close button allows you to cancel the choices made.6. You cannot write in the entry boxes. Shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface. When all the different parameters have been configured. N. Note that the ALS procedure is activated ( if enable ) only when the fiber has been interrupted and the ALS state has not to be confused with the laser state.All rights reserved. Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 126/399 . Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). This dialogue box can only be read. Visualizing a port optical parameters The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics: • • • STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types: STM1/STM4 The wavelength of the laser source: the units are nanometers (nm = 10-9 m). an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx side. The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx. Passing on and copying of this document. The use of the port : describes whether the laser port is used for interoffice transmissions on long distances (Long Haul) 40 km) or for interoffice transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ] 15 km). the Rx part in the remote receive side checks the congruency between the received and the expected labels. Figure 93.6. For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the optical line is interrupted. The Colored Interface Parameters section is not applicable in the current release To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button.All rights reserved. Shows that are accepted the label "1" from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label "2" from Tx2 to Rx1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 11. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 127/399 .3 Single Fibber Configuration The single fiber configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers. If a signal label mismatch is recognized on the received section. an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. Example of Figure below. assigned label to Tx (0-14) Transmitted Media Type . the following fields have to be considered: • • Allow Single Fiber . Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the SDH Single Fiber Configuration option.overhead byte used for the communication: . Transmitted Section: • • Transmitted Media Byte . Passing on and copying of this document. In the figure that opens. Figure 94.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 128/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section or .select the transmit mode on the single fiber (enable or disable).S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the SSM) • Received Section: • • Received label Expected label (0-14) ED 01 SC. 5 Line Length Configuration To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu option of the Physical Media menu.4 Ms Configuration The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section Object (MSTTP) in SONET/SDH network interworking.All rights reserved. This dialog allows selecting between SDH or SONET networks. Passing on and copying of this document.6. After the selection click on Apply and then on Close to close the dialog.6. Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release. This dialog allows configuring the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port. Ms Configuration 11. Figure 96. Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port menu. Figure 95. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Single Fiber Configuration View 11. ED 01 SC. Select the MSP TP. The OK button validates the configuration and closes the dialog box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 129/399 . Figure 97. Figure 98. PDH Line Length Configuration View 11. Ethernet Port Configuration options ED 01 SC. select the Ethernet Port Configuration option of the Port -> Physical Media menu as shown in Figure below.6.The Cancel button removes the dialog All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 130/399 . Passing on and copying of this document.6 Ethernet Port Configuration To set Ethernet port parameters. a question dialog is displayed to advice that the user has changed data but not applied them. The "Directionality" is always Full Duplex Moreover It is possible to Restart the “ Auto Negotiation”by depressing the relevant button. Passing on and copying of this document. Auto navigation “: enable allows to configure the " Rate " to be negotiated (10 or 100 Mb/s).Subsequently Figure below. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog For the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port it is possible to choose between two “ Configuration Type” : 1. All rights reserved. The " Directionality" (Full Duplex) and the "Flow Control" (Activated) are always enabled and can't be changed. Will be opened. Figure 99. 2.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 131/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 100. Information dialog In read only mode there are indication if the A uto negotiation on remote side is activated ED 01 SC. if parameters has been changed before pressing the Restart button. "Manual” : allows forcing the "Rate" at 10 or 100 Mb/s. In both cases is possible to check the “ Auto negotiation Current State”with the possible massage: – Completed OK – Completed KO – Configuring – Deactivated – Parallel Defect Fail – Other At the bottom of the port view are displayed the following indications): – The “ Interface Type” : • S1000 Base SX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) • S1000 Base LX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) • S1000CX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) • S100BaseTX • S100BaseFX • Unknown • S10BaseT – The “ Bit Rate”(only for fast Ethernet board): • 10 Mb/s • 100 Mb/s All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.(Remote Auto Negotiation) and what parameters are allowed on remote (Remote Allowed Parameters). Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 132/399 . ED 01 SC. Click on PortEthernet Mapping Protocol option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. Figure 101.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol Select a VC TP. Figure 102. Figure below opens. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 133/399 . Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) 11.6. This dialog aims to show the activation state of the virtualTPs present in the Ethernet Port View and to change the number of virtualTPs active.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 134/399 . Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board) ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.This dialog aims to show the actual Ethernet mapping protocol used and allowing the user to change it. Passing on and copying of this document.6.8 Control Path Activation This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port virtualTPs. 11. Click on Control Path Activation option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. A new window will be opened. The Active state is reached by choosing the number of “ Virtual TPs to be active”and click on the Apply button. Figure 103. The options available are the following: – FAST ETHERNET boards: • GFP null extension Header with FCS • GFP null extension Header without FCS • GFP for packed concatenation extended – GIGABIT ETHERNET boards: • GFP null extension Header with FCS • GFP null extension Header without FCS All rights reserved. Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window. a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the “ ISA Port configuration”window. On the contrary to change in Idle the Active state of a TP decrease the “ Virtual TPs to be active”field and then and click on the Apply button. Click on the Refresh button to update the changes. Click on Close button to close the Control Path Activation window. Example figure below is the Active state. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 11.6.9 LCAS management 11.6.9.1 LCAS Introduction The LCAS protocol is supported since R. 2.1 in ISA Ethernet Switch board at STM-1 ES18FE/8FX and since R.2.2 in ISA Ethernet switch at STM-4. Board and ISA Gigabit Ethernet (GETH-MB). 11.6.9.1.1 LCAS parameters The indication that LCAS protocol can be activated on a virtual concatenation group is represented by the instantiation of the conditonal package lcasControlPackage on vcnXVritualTTP (n=12, 3, 4). The following conditonal packages have to be instantiated on vcnXVirtualTTP (n=12, 3, 4) for supporting lcas specific parameter: l MaxDifferentialDelayPackage for reporting the max supported (by the board) differential delay and for configuring the maximum tolerated differential delay; the default value has been chosen at 48(ms). ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 135/399 l RsAckTimeoutPkg for configuring the timeout of re-sequence acknowledge; the default value has been chosen at 512 (ms) . Note: the conditional packages tsdContributionPkg, holdOffTimeAndWTRPackage have not to be instantiated. 11.6.9.1.2 LCAS operations The action controlPathActivation allows to activate (ADD) more than one member (vc nVirtualTTP) with a single manager request. Similarly is possible to de-activate (REMOVE) more than one member (vc -nVirtua lTTP) with a single manager request. The capability of de-activating (REMOVE) specific members ( vc -nVirtualTTP) is supported, this functionality is not working if LCAS protocol is not activated, but it’ s possible to de-activate from last active member. Simmetrically the capability of activating (ADD) specific members ( vc-nVirtualTTP) is supported. The activation of LCAS protocol on a virtual concatenation group already working is possible, but it’ s a traffic-affecting operation since it requires to de-activate all members before LCAS enabling. The symmetrical operation (even if not meaningful) of de-activing the LCAS protocol on a virtual concatantion group already working is possible, such operation impacts the traffic bandwidth transmission since it requires of remaining with only the vc -VirtualTTP with ID=1 as active member. 11.6.9.1.3 LCAS protocol information For monitoring the LCAS protocol the lcasMonitor action is provided; some parameters returned by the action are defined as Optional, the following ones are expected to be anyway returned:the number of working members in tx, the number of working members in Rx, the member identifier reference for MST (TBC), the received rs-ack bit (TBC), the transmitted rs -ack bit (TBC), the differential delay of each member. 11.6.9.1.4 Alarm indications If the LCAS protocol is activated the following alarm indications can be raised: At virtual path level (vc -nVirtualTTP, n=12, 3, 4) l Member Not De-skew-able (probableCause excessiveDifferentialDelay): when the virtual path has a differential delay which can’ t be compensated; if LCAS is not activated this alarm correponds to LossOfAlignment alarm raised at virtual group level (virtualPTC). at virtual concatenation group level (vc -nXVirtualTTP, n=12, 3, 4): l Loss Of Partial (probableCause bandwidthReduced): when one of active members vc nVirtualTTP) is affected by SSF, TIM, UNEQ, L OM or ExcessiveDifferentialDelay. l LossOfTotal (probableCause serverSignalFailure): when all the active members are affected by SSF,TIM, UNEQ, LOM or ExcessiveDifferentialDelay. l LCAS protocol failure (probableCause communicationsProtocolError) raised when inconsistent sequence numbering of the members is received or the CRC error control fails on LCAS multiframed packet. 11.6.9.2 LCAS Configuration This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port. Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window. Click on LCAS Configuration option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 136/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. A new window will be opened; a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the “ ISA Port configuration”window. This dialog aim is LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme) protocol management of the TPs present in the Ethernet Port View. The button "Apply" will set the configuration if the LCAS protocol is enabled. In the following picture we can note that are managed all the attributes described before and the two actions are managed by means of the two buttons (Enable/Disable and Monitoring...). All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 104. LCAS Configuration The "Monitoring..." button start the "LCAS protocol monitoring" view like the figure below. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 137/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 105. LCAS Monitoring 11.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access (PRA) and G.703/G.704 frame management. PRA management The PRA functionality performs termination bi–directional function for Time Slot 0 on framed with CRC–4 2 Mbit/s signal. In detail, it extracts in sink direction and writes in source direction particular bits (E, Sa5, Sa6 and A) of the Time Slot 0. Moreover, it generates substitution frames in case of detection of LOS on the signal coming from a Terminal Equipment. The PRA functionality has been extended in order to manage proprietary handling of the bits of Time Slot 0 (Framed with leased line PRA option) in terms of state, defect detection and consequent actions. G.703/G.704 management This functionality allows to activate the adaptation function to process a framed (G.704 interface) or not framed (G.703 interface) 2Mbit/s signal. This TP Frame Mode Configuration option is available for: – P12–CTP Select the desired P12–CTP and then the Port –>TP Frame Mode Configuration option. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 138/399 TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the “ Transmission”and “ Synchronization”view menu. The following dialog appears: All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 106. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: –” Framed Signal Mode”that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode; the user can choose one of the following value: • ” Not Framed”(G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activated; • “ Framed without PRA”(G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300–233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state, defect detection and consequent action; • ” Framed with PRA” : PRA function is activated • ” Framed with leased line PRA” : a proprietary leased line behavior is applied. –“ CRC4 Status“that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: • “ Operation” : allows to configure the CRC–4 processing modalities; the possible value are: • “ Disabled”that disables the CRC–4 • “ Forced”that configures CRC–4 with consequent actions • “ Automatic”that triggers the CRC–4 algorithms in order to allow interworking of pieces ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 139/399 of equipment with and without a CRC4 capability. • “ Monitoring Enabling” : enable or disable the CRC–4 error counting • ” Remote Indication” : read–only field that indicates if status of CRC–4 error counting functionality of far–end NE is enabled or disabled. –“ Loss of Synch Consequent Action”allows to perform the consequent action on the transmitted 2M/s signal with retiming when the CRU is in Holdover or Free running mode; the consequent action is performed only if PRA or leased line application ha been configured on the associated P12–CTP. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. –“ Frame Status”is a read–only field that reports an indication of the received signal: •” No indication” • “ The 2Mb/s signal is multi–frame” Press Ok to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog. 11.8 Show Supporting Board Select a TP. Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the board that supports the selected port view. Figure below. (Example) opens. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 140/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 107. Board View Example. 11.9 Navigate to Transmission View Select a TP. Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Transmission View that is related to the selected TP. Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about the signal flow as for the example of the following figure. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 141/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 108. “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 142/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 109. After “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection 11.10 Navigate to Monitoring View Select a TP where are configured some Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC) Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP. Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC) as for the example of the following figure. In Figure below is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with POM and TCM both before and after matrix. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 143/399 View of Monitoring Operations (example) 11.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 144/399 . Figure 110.All rights reserved. Figure below. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.11 Port Mode Overview Click on Port mode option of the Configuration–> Port mode menu. All rights reserved. Port Mode Menu Option 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 111.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 145/399 . Figure 112. Port Mode Overview Dialog You can select the port type you want to see. then you can click the port you want to set at the found port list table.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 146/399 . And set the port mode. As below. Passing on and copying of this document. and click the search button to list them. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. set the selected port mode 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 113.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 147/399 . handling millions of communications. or n. which can be configured: • All rights reserved. This priority can be 1. This protection is realized according to a protection scheme.. the switch to the protecting element is maintained even after a recovery from failure. In Board view. Switching the board supporting the protected service when this board fails to a protecting board capable of supporting the same service performs the protection.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 148/399 .12 Equipment Protection management (EPS) 12. . Force Switch EPS. 2. consequent to equipment failure. • Protection priority: A priority can be assigned to protected units in 1+n protection schemes. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Everything must be done so that the communications can continue smoothly and so that the equipment failure remains transparent to the users. the protection wait to restore time prevents several protection switches due to an intermittent failure. Group type: 1+1 or 1+n The group type specifies if one or more unreliable resources for protection can be assigned to one or more reliable resources. • Configuration type: revertive or non revertive In revertive mode. a protected service will be switched back to its protected element when it has recovered from its failure. Passing on and copying of this document. Protection management deals with this aspect of the EML-USM. the board whose content is represented is considered as implicitly selected.1 Introduction It is unthinkable to launch a telecommunications system. 1+1 group type means that one protecting unit protects a working element. 1+n group type means that only one protecting unit protects n working elements. A protected element must be fault free during this fixed period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. In non-revertive mode. without the possibility of replacing equipment in a real time way.. ED 01 SC. 1 being the highest priority. • Protection wait to restore time: Used when revertive mode is active. The actions that can be undertaken are of the following type: • • Consult and modify an Equipment Protection Scheme (EPS). Board duplication remains the easiest way to ensure equipment protection in a system. An equipment protection scheme is composed of the following parameters. Consulting EPS The following dialogue box is opened. Select the Equipment option in the View pull down menu.. The current release of this NE fixes the following protection: • N+1 (with N 6) "P63E1 or P63E1N" protection . Figure 115. perform the following operations: The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu to present the subrack view. slots 24-27-30-33-3639 ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The available protection schemes are coherent with the NE type and release. • • All rights reserved. The list gives for each protecting board the protected board(s).2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS In order to consult EPS. 12. Then select the Management. The right side of the dialogue box allows modifying the EPS configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P63E1 or P63E1N. Select the EPS pull down menu.. EPS Management dialogue box The EPS Management dialogue box shows the current NE protection schemes in the left side.The functional state message area of the boards involved in an equipment protection scheme displays EPS protection states.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 149/399 . Figure 114. depending on the equipment configuration.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P63E1 or P63E1N. The only constraint is the following: • • • • • The access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card The HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group The main/spare boards have to be adjacent The protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards The protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type • 1+1 "ATM MATRIX 4x4" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. from slot 24 to 38 • All rights reserved. • 1+1 "ATM MATRIX 8x8" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4E3/T3. The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N. from slot 25 to 39 .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 150/399 . from slot 24 to 38 N. from slot 25 to 39 . Passing on and copying of this document. • 1+1 ISA PR_EA (PREA4ETH. For P3E3/T3 and P4ES1N more than one protection group N+1 revertive can be created. This does not apply to the local STM-1 interface so the traffic on it is lost.B.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. N+1 (with N 15) "P4ES1N" protection . In ED 01 SC. slot 32 • N+1 (with N 15) "P3E3/T3" protection . In this configuration the ATM MATRIX a nd all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. PREA1GBE)”protection The ISA PR_EA boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present. The upper part provides a message field with the name of the Protecting board and a choose button to display the list of boards available. The board are listed opening the NE>rack>subrack levels. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. If user clicks where there is no item displayed. The user can add. This right side is divided into two parts. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box. the OK button close the dialog box and create the scheme (the new list is update re-opening the EPS Management dialogue box). The Cancel push button closes the dialog box. This does not apply to the local interface so the traffic on it is lost. When the right part of window is correctly filled. no restrictions for position of main and spare ISA PR_EA are present. a) Scheme displaying To display a specific scheme. c) Scheme deletion ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 151/399 . For each type of failure on the MATRIX main board (CRU. After that operation. Passing on and copying of this document. Press this button to displays a window to choose a board in the "Board Selection" list. don't click on item in the left list. always using the same "Board Selection" list dialogue box presented. • 1+1 "MATRIX" protection .this configuration the ISA PR_EA and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against module failure.Board of slot 23. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. b) Scheme creation To create a new protection scheme. A delete butto n enables user to remove a protected board from a scheme. It is not created with the EPS menu described in this chapter. . The lower part provides a list to display the Protected boards currently in the displayed scheme.B. Choose Protecting button becomes insensitive and Choose Protected becomes sensitive. as many protected boards as wanted. A choose button is provided to display the list of boards which could be added as protected.Board of slot 40. In this way the right part is displayed empty and the Choose Protecting button is sensitive. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. MATRIX spare (protecting) N. MATRIX main (protected) All rights reserved. user selects an item on the left list. This operation fills the protecting element text field and the protected list with the board user name. Shelf Controller) a switch is performed to the spare boards The MATRIX protection is automatically presented in the left side of the dialog box when the SPARE MATRIX is created in the Set option of the Equipment menu. the right part is displayed empty. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 152/399 . By selecting a protected board and using the Delete Protected button.To delete an existing protection scheme. Passing on and copying of this document. user could add protected boards. Figure 116. user could delete the scheme. the user selects a scheme in the left list. the user selects a scheme in the left list. When the right part of window is correctly filled. Using Choose button for protected elements. Using the Delete button. user could remove protected elements from scheme. d) Scheme modification To modify an existing protection scheme by adding or removing protection units. EPS: board selection ED 01 SC. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box. the OK button close the dialog box and modify the scheme. EPS functional state from protected active board view Figure 119. Passing on and copying of this document. In order to configure. EPS: choose protected The EPS functional state of a board selected in the board view is displayed at the bottom of the view as shown in the following figures. Then select the Configure. Figure 118. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 153/399 . Select the EPS pull down menu. Figure 120 Configure EPS The following dialogue box is opened. EPS functional state from protecting active board view 12. perform the following operations: • • Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS This functionality configures Revertive and Wait Time to restore in a protection scheme.All rights reserved. Figure 117. For this NE: • • • • • • • 1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 is Not Revertive only 1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only 1+1 MATRIX is Not Revertive only N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1N) protection is Revertive N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive N+1 4xSTM-1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive When the configuration of the equipment protection scheme is completed confirm closing the dialog box by clicking on the OK pus h button. 12. ED 01 SC. Notes: in the current release the Wait Time to Restore is fixed to 5 minutes. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialog box. Only for N+1 EPS.All rights reserved. The available values are revertive and non revertive The wait time to restore time value (steps of 30 seconds. from 60 to 600).4 Switching EPS This functionality enables to force a protecting board to work even if there is not failure. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 121. EPS Management dialogue box The dialog box provides configuration for elements such as: • • • • • The name of the protecting element as a label The Equipment Type (board) of the protecting element as a label A list displaying the protected elements owned by the scheme The Revertive Mode flag as an option menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 154/399 . in the current release. 12. perform the following operations: • • Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. Clicking on the OK push button will initiate the switch and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. In order to switch an EPS. EPS Switch dialogue box This dialogue box displays in its left part the EPS of the selected board. Selecting the EPS Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below. active only if the other board is not alarmed. Figure 123. only the Lockout options.The forced switch will fail if the other board is already forced switched or if the protecting board has a failure condition. Switching EPS The following dialogue box is opened. All rights reserved.5 EPS Overview EPS Overview allows displaying as well as search for EPS states. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the EPS pull down menu. From this dialogue box the operator can configure. Then select the Switch. Passing on and copying of this document. Opens ED 01 SC. The Manual to command perform the "manual" switch. Figure 122. by clicking on the relevant radio button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 155/399 . Board Type: allows filtering for the EPS protected boards. Figure 124. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the following filters values should be offered (examples) • • • • • • • • • Ignore SYNTH1N MATRIX MATRIXN P3E3/T3 P63E1 P63E1N P4ES1N ATM4X4 01 SC. EPS overview To Search the EPS groups two different ways of filtering are supported. Passing on and copying of this document. a filtering for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 156/399 ED .All rights reserved. EPS overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: Protection Group (example protection Groupld. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Ignore Normal DNR Auto-Fail Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout After the filter selection click on Search button to start.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 157/399 . the following values should be offered (examples): • • • • • • • • All rights reserved. 40) ED 01 SC.Status: allows filtering for all possible EPS protection states. Passing on and copying of this document..) Figure 125. the field below the Search button will be updated (see Figure below. Cyan (Indicative) for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the button of the EPS Overview windows are available five buttons that allows navigating through the EPS management views and subrack view. Passing on and copying of this document. board view.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 158/399 . In this way the operator has a quick link towards the views showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states.Open Subrack View: opens the Subrack view showing the protection states with icons on the boards (see Figure below.Orange (Major): for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for auto switch or commands .Green (OK): for protected protection units active .) The possible protection states and the relevant symbols are explained in the following: Symbol EPS protection status No Request Do not Revert Lockout ED 01 SC.- Board Id (example r01sr1/board#40) Board Role: • • Ped Ping (Protected) (Protecting) All rights reserved. protection unit in lockout or active on auto switch or commands . N.B. B Status (board status) • • • A S F (Active) (Standby) (Faulty) - Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit follow • • • • • • • Normal DNR Auto-Fail Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout (Do Not Revert) (Auto switch Equipment Fail) (Auto switch Wait Time to Restore) (Manual switch) (Force switch) The colors used for each row have the following meaning: . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. and the relevant description. Open Commands: opens the EPS Switch dialog box. and the relevant description. and the relevant description. Clock on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window Figure 126. Passing on and copying of this document. .Auto Switch (WTR.EPS Management: opens the EPS Management dialog box. Subrack view after “ Open Subrack View”command ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 159/399 .EPS Parameters: opens the EPS Configuration dialog box. Fail) Manual Forced .Open Board View: opens the board view showing the alarm and the board administrative states All rights reserved. . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 127.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 160/399 . Board view after “ Open Board View”command 01 SC. The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. No k1/k2 communication protocol is provided thus this protection can be only single ended. G.Select Equipment from the Views menu .Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon . The WTR time is used with revertive mode. In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching both the affected and the unaffected signals. whe re a path signal is protected by another dedicated path carrying the same signal. For this NE is applicable the APS 1+1 Proprietary. G783/G841. . Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard Described in ITU-T Rec. the system switches to the other cable and port. 13. The SD threshold reference values depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS termination point. The MS Linear Trail Protection can be applied to any NE where it is possible to configure a linear APS (single ended/dual ended) line protection. The reference switching criteria are SF and SD.2 MSP Options Introduction All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step explained below: . The protection can be set both in single (unidirectional) and in dual (bidirectional) ended mode. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Architecture types The Multiplex Section Protection in the connection between two NEs protected by cable and port duplication. m the APS 1+1 Standard and the APS 1:1 Standard dual ended. The APS 1+1 (not revertive) feature permits a 1+1 protection in a linear link.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 161/399 All rights reserved. Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used) The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching only the signal affected by the failure.783/G841 as architecture 1 : n (with n=1). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection mechanisms when a SD is recognized on the working port. It provides a k1/k2 communication protocol thus this protection can be single or dual ended. The spare interface can be used to transport "low priority traffic". It provides revertive mode managed by k1/k2 protocol and thus this protection can be single or dual ended. At the source the signal is duplicated and sent to the sink via two independent cables. Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used) Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used) Described in ITU-T Rec.13 Multiplex Section Protection Management 13.Double click on the port icon to open the port view ED 01 SC. When occurs a multiplex section failure. Passing on and copying of this document. the possible choice are: • • • • MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete MSP Create. MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be accessed from the Transmission-> MSP menu All rights reserved. Figure 128.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 162/399 ..) to open the MSP Schema Creation. MSP Management. 13. MSP Create Option ED 01 SC.3 MSP Create Select the MSP Create option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by clicking on Port -> MSP menu. High or Low) ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 163/399 . Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Is opened Following steps are necessary: Choose Port Select a Port Role (protected or protecting) Define Channel Id (mandatory for MSP N: 1) Define SDH Priority (type of traffic. Figure below. Figure 129. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. MSP Schema Creation In this release two MSP Protection Schemas are supported: MSP 1+1 standard MSP N: 1 standard Select one and then click on Add Port button in the Ports field to create a MSP schema. Figure 130. Figure below is opened ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. MSP schema creation Port dialog Select the Choose Port button to define the "Protected Port" and "Protecting Port" units. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 164/399 . On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK button. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. TP Search Click on Rack-Subrack and select the Board (Protected/Protecting) on the "Equipment" window (left side). ED 01 SC. Figure 131.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 165/399 . It is possible to select the board through the "Board History" button selecting the board list menu. The "termination Points" list (right side) is available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. OpS class must be selected. In the dialogue of Figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 166/399 .The "Filter Section" is divided into different fields. Passing on and copying of this document. Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both “ Protected Port" and "Protecti ng Port". No revertive N+1 Standard can be only dual-ended Revertive. ED 01 SC. Also configure the MSP protection schema with the chosen Protection Schema and enter the related Schema Parameters according the following rules: • • All rights reserved. An error message will be appear if the NE does not support the selected schema Figure 132. At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema configuration. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) 13. If used. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It permits to visualize a reduced TP Class. 1+1 Standard can be dual-ended or single-ended. If it has been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in a previously MSP schema protection an error message of access denied will be appear on the screen.4 MSP Management Select the MSP Management option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the MSP Schema Configuration. The complete TP research description is reported in the "Transmission View". MSP Management Option The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. At the end click on the OK button to configure the MSP protection schema. This dialog allows setting the configuration parameters for the designated multiplex section: Protection Schema reported in the previous paragraph Architecture Types Schema Parameters: • • • • Dual Ended / Single Ended protection switch and directionality. setting and state (protected or protecti ng) of the current SDH-n port. value is 14) Priority: type of traffic. An error message will be appear if the selected schema in not supported by the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 167/399 .All rights reserved. Revertive/Non Revertive mode The WTR Time (Wait to Restore) is the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure / defect. High or Low Configure the MSP protection Schema with the chosen protection schema and enter the related schema parameters. Passing on and copying of this document. - Ports area display the current MSP schema: • • • • Port Id: identify the location of the board Role: identify the role of the board ("Protecting" or "Protected") Channel Id: mandatory for MSP N:1 (max. Enable Switch on SD is not operative in current release. Figure 133. all active switches must be cleared (manual switch. MSP Management View 13.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 168/399 . Figure 135.All rights reserved.4. Passing on and copying of this document. MSP Delete option ED 01 SC. If the operator wants to change the protection schema architecture or the ports involved in the MSP schema. 13. the current schema must be removed and re-created. lockout.5 MSP Delete Select the MSP Delete option from the Port->MSP menu (see Figure below.) to open the "MSP Schema Deletion".1 MSP modification The same MSP Management option can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP configuration. Before changing a single ended (unidirectional) schema into a dual ended (bidirectional).). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 134. All rights reserved. "Related Unit" stands for the related unit of the same protection group.(green color) Displayed if an automatic switch is requested.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 169/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. the SF or SD has been recovered but the traffic is switched on the spare port PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port RF: a release command has been failed ED 01 SC. Some examples are reported in Figure below. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the protecting port is ready to save the traffic (and becomes active). The active protection status is referred to a protected/protecting port (where the traffic is transported): when a failure is detected.Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). The status indications are: NR: (abbreviation of No Request). Figure 136. MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit . "Own Unit" stands for the currently displayed unit in the port view. MSP Group Status.6 Display of Protection State The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view. normal. The sta ndby protection status is referred to a protecting/protected port that is ready to save the traffic. MSP Schema Deletion Click on " OK " button to delete the selected MSP Schema Configuration 13. the traffic is on the main port DNR: (abbreviation of Do Not Revert). The following states are always displayed: Port Status . idle condition. OK . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. but can be overwritten by a switch with higher priority.FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected Complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed Pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending The "complete" and "pending" indications precede the following statuses: AS: automatic protection switching enabled All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 170/399 .(green color) indicates where the operator commands (force/manual/lockout) have been performed.Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes.Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command . A remote switch cannot be released locally. The following values are possible: . . MS: a manual local protection command has been activated FS: a forced local protection command has been activated LO: a lockout local protection command has been activated SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been detected WTR: wait time to restore status MSP Request Source . MSP Protocol Status This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status. Only present when a command is operative. Passing on and copying of this document.Failure (in case of FOP) ED 01 SC. In any situation are represent the statuses displayed on both protected/protecting Port views. The Active status indication. MSP Protection Status E xamples Figure up. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 137.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 171/399 . ED 01 SC. Represent a MSP configuration with a normal condition.All rights reserved. shows where the forced command is applied. with an automatic protection switching and with a forced command. with a forced command on the protecting group. Passing on and copying of this document. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 172/399 . Protected Port: the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed. MSP Commands option Protecting Port: the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed. The Manual to command switches the working channel (Protection port) to the protection section (Protection port). unless an equal or higher priority request ED 01 SC. Is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Manual to" Protected port command. For 1+1 non-revertive system. by issuing a "Manual" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status)" of MSP Management). For 1+1 non-revertive system. It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Forced to" Protected port command. unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. The lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the protection section by issuing a "Lockout" of protection request (on the "Protection Status" of MSP Management).7 MSP Commands Select the MSP Commands option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the "MSP Command window". unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exits on the protection section. forced switch no working channel transfer the working channel back from protection to working section. It is possible to "Lockout the Protecting Port" or "Lockout the Protected Port". to remove the lockout commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for the protected). Figure 138. manual switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from protection to working section. Passing on and copying of this document. unless a failure condition exits on the protection section or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect. by issuing a "Forced" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status" of MSP Management). Since forced switch has higher priority than SF or SD on working section.13. The Force to command switches the working channel (Protected port) to the protection section (Protecting port ). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. this command will be carried out regardless of the working section condition. The Release command clears all previously switching commands. unless the protection channel is in use.e.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 173/399 . Figure 139. The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and checks response on MSP bytes. Not operative in current release. Table 1. Passing on and copying of this document. "Auto-switch" is operative. MSP commands and Auto -switch protection priority Lockout of Forced to Auto--switch Manual to Protection Lockout of Protection Forced to Auto-switch Manual to ______________ Lockout Lockout Lockout Lockout Lockout Lockout ______________ Forced Forced Forced ______________ Auto--switch Forced Auto--switch ______________ ED 01 SC. This check controls the k1/k2 communication protocol functionality to be sure that the protocol is right also on the protection section. Manual to. Since manual switch has lower priority than SF or SD on working section.is in effect.: if an "Auto-switch" and a "Manual to" command are present. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands. Auto-switch (SF&SD). All rights reserved. Force to. Table 1. MSP Commands The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one)_ Lockout. The first column on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and the external MSP commands. this command will be carried out only if the working section is not in SF or SD condition The Clear WTR command cancels the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure/defect. The row/column crossing gives the command or protection result (i. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: . MSP overview To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported. Passing on and copying of this document.13.Board Type: allows filtering for the MSP protected boards. the following filters values should be offered (example): • • Ignore P4ES1N 01 SC. Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below opens All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.8 MSP overview MSP Overview allows displaying as well as search for MSP states.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 174/399 ED . a filtering foe all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units’ carrying a specific Status. Figure 140. the following filters values should be offered (example): • • • • • • • • • • • Ignore NR (Normal) DNR Auto-SF Auto-SD Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout APS Invalid (Fail) Bad channel (Fail) After the filter selection click on Search button to start.) ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 175/399 .All rights reserved.Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states. Passing on and copying of this document. the field below the Search button will be update (see Figure below. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • P4S1N P4E4N P4S4N P16S1N S-41N L-41N L-42N S-161 S-161N S-161ND L-161 L-161N L-161ND L-162 L-162N L-162ND MATRIX MATRIXN . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 137) Port Id (example r01sr1sl33/port#02-OpS) Role: • • Ped Ping Protected Protecting - Status (board status): • • • • A S F ET (Active) (Standby) (Faulty) Extra Traffic (Not operative) - Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow ED 01 SC. MSP overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: Protection Group (example protection Groupld.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 176/399 .All rights reserved. Figure 141. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 177/399 . (See Figure below) .MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box Click on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window ED 01 SC.MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box .• • • • • • • • • • All rights reserved.MSP Create: opens the MSP Create dialog box.MSP Delete: opens the MSP Delete dialog box .Green (OK): for protected protection units active . . By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states.Orange (Major) for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for autoswitch or commands .Open Port view: opens the port view showing the correlation between the alarm and the MSP protection states. NR (Normal) DNR (Do Not Revert) Auto-SF (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) Auto-SD (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) Auto-WTR (AutoSwitch Wait Time To Restore) Manual (Manual Switch) Force Lockout APS Invalid (Protection fail condition APS invalid) Bad channel (Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch) The colors used for each row have the following meaning: . N.Cyan (Indicative: for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five buttons that allows to navigate through the MSP management views and to open the Port View. protection unit in lockout or active on autoswitch on commands .B. Passing on and copying of this document.Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: . All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Port view after “ Open Port View”commands 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 178/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 142. Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection (Not operative in the current release) Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands.1 Overview This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation. o Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and display it in the Transmission View.g. Expanding and hiding TPs that are related to the currently selected TP (e. TPs down to AU-4). an arrow indicates it • An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action.g. show all TPs that are above the TU-12 CTP) enables all related TPs to be added to the view.Whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring indicated by a blue "P" letter . The result is that the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate the connections. To display the termination points in the Transmission View. The user can select a TP and apply the action Show Cross-connected TPs. The following states are indicated: .Whether a TP is involved in a loop action.A cross indicates the cross-connection state . offers the possibility of displaying a single TP or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is represented by one/several TPs). providing a representation of the entire signal flow. Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 179/399 .The alarm synthesis icon indicates the alarm state . either select specific TPs from a TP search dialog or access the view directly from another view. e. TP names are listed in an additional information area if the mouse pointer is positioned over it. o An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in by activating the function to expand the selected TP. All TPs/compound TPs associated with the physical port are displayed (i.A circle indicates whether a TP can be structured . The Transmission View provides the following features: • All rights reserved. modification and configuration of TPs. o Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. Passing on and copying of this document.14 Transmission View 14.e. Display of single or multiple termination points. by navigating from the Port View. thus providing a representation of the entire signal flow. described in this chapter. Brief overview regarding transmission resources. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The generic Transmission View. • • • • ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 143. which provides the Transmission View operations. 14. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 View elements All rights reserved. navigating to the Port view.• • • Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP. and the specific Transmission View pull down menu. Symbols Used in Transmission View 14. Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms. The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 180/399 . Calling the configuration dialogs of the common Transmission/Port Views category accesses this functionality. which display the transmission resources. ED 01 SC. Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring parameters and data. It provides views of specific areas.3 View Layout The Transmission View is a main view. Passing on and copying of this document. The objects initially displayed depend on the situation/definition.3.3 Naming TPs The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 181/399 .3. TPs that are received from the network element are displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and connection symbols described in The number of TPs presented initially depends on whether the Transmission View is popped up from a board view.1 View Description Figure below. 14. thus displaying all underlying TPs. which are of no interest.14.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View It is possible both to expand a VC-4. and to hide TPs. Illustrates the Transmission View area.3. whether a TP has been selected in another view or whether it is called without a selected TP. Figure 144. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Transmission View Area 14. When the "Transmission view" is reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu in its initial state contains no objects. Example: modification of the payload structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3. only the selected TP is displayed. Select the TP to show on the Transmission Display TPs that are related to the selected TP. the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. Navigation to Transmission View from other views If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View. Expand Hide the selected TP.3. The TP objects are updated accordingly. Selecting the "Transmission" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Transmission menu is presented The following menu items are available: • • • • Add TP view. in its initial state. In this case.4 Dynamic View Behaviour The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of events that affect the view. In the case of navigation from another view (example the "Port view") to the Transmission View. All rights reserved.4 Transmission view access and menu The "Transmission view" can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. Object deletion The TP objects indicate all kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. 14. TP Configuration Synchronous TP's. All child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree. Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP or Set parameters for the Overhead on ED 01 SC. The graphical objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission View. Alarm notification The alarm synthesis icons of the TP objects indicate alarms concerning the TPs displayed graphically. Passing on and copying of this document. Objects can be searched for and displayed using the Add TP dialog. the Transmission View contains no objects. Working state of the view In its working state. the view is first initialized again and then the TP is displayed. The same applies in the case of navigation from another view to the Transmission View .• • The root node contains the full user label. the Transmission View contains no objects. 14. the Transmission View already contains objects. Initial state of the view In its initial state. If the operator searches for and displays a TP using the TP Search dialog.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 182/399 . Navigate to Port View Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP. See MSP Management.703/G. not used in this NE. for commissioning or maintenance purposes Physical Media Manage the physical TP setting. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced. Terminate TP Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP Disterminate TP Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP AU4 Concatenation Cross-Connection Manage the connection of the paths. Monitoring Operations Create. Not available for PDH port. Performance Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Structure TPs Provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring selected TP Loopback Manage the loopback commands.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 183/399 . configure and delete POM/SUT and TC TP's. MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Figure 145. Passing on and copying of this document.704 or ISDN-PRA management TP Threshold Configuration Set B2 ExBER and Degraded Signal parameters. In this paragraph is not described the MSP>NE MSP synthesis option of the Transmission menu. • • • • • • • TP Frame Mode Configuration Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.5 Add TP ED 01 SC.• • • • • • • All rights reserved. Transmission menu options 14. Show Supported Board Navigate to the upper board level. Double-click again to recall the next level All rights reserved. they are displayed in a hierarchical order. Figure 146.Select the Transmission -> Add TP option. the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of the dialog (TP list).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 184/399 . TP Search Dialog. 14.1 TP Search Default Mode In this mode. The TP Search dialog enables the user to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e.g. To keep the number of items displayed small. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. on a port. This menu item opens the TP Search dialog. e. Initial State ED 01 SC. After double -clicking. search for all TPs on a board with PM enabled).g. the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree.5. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.After double -clicking on an object. Figure 147.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 185/399 . All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. To select a block of TPs. But only the first TP selected in the list will be shown in the Transmission View. an Information window appears (see). ED 01 SC. The message text corresponds to the object selected. Information Window It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. click on the first TP and then click on the last TP in the block while holding down the Shift key on the keyboard. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 186/399 . a more detailed TP list is displayed containing TP cross connection status information. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 148. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections After clicking on Show CC State. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 187/399 . Select the relevant board from the list. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 149.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed The symbols in the TP list have the following significance: Figure 150. Symbols in TP Search The background color of the symbols represents the status of the TP: • • Grey = inactive Green = active An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History. GMAU. AU-4. TU2. critical. OpS. The following options are available: • Class: Ignore.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 188/399 . • Connection State (Current connectivity status): Ignore. Figure 151. EML • Perf. VC-12. connected • Alarm State (Path Trace): Ignore. Passing on and copying of this document. major.All rights reserved. AUX. VC-4. E1S. RS. enabled • • • • TTI expect: not used TTI receive: not used TTI transmit: not used Location: Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format: r<rack#>sr<subrack#>sl<slot#><port#> ED 01 SC. Board History Check List Search Mode Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list. minor. TU-12+VC12. warning. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition): Ignore. MS. TU-3. NML. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. TU-12. TU-3+VC-3. PPI. AU-4+VC-4. not connected. not alarmed • Assign State: Ignore. OGP. ED 01 SC. Clicking on Cancel can interrupt the search. Passing on and copying of this document.• Name: not supported All rights reserved. Figure 152. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 189/399 . TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options After activating the search process with the Search TP button. the following dialog box appears. Passing on and copying of this document.”Dialog for Search Process N. The command opens the following dialog: All rights reserved.B. The dialog changes after clicking on File : ED 01 SC. When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE. Common Buttons The following buttons are available in all modes: Ok Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP. Print This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current filter selection. Close Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View. Rack or Subrack. It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the board level (a board is selected for the search).Figure 153. Print to Printer Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or abort with Cancel. “ Information. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 154.. the time for the request can be very high..3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 190/399 . ED 01 SC. Figure 155. Use Cancel to stop the process. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 156. Example Printout Help This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 191/399 .All rights reserved. Print to File Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File Select dialog by clicking on Select file . Select if the output format should be Postscript or ASCII . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 14. TP Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. Example: • • • All rights reserved.6 TP Configuration Select the Transmission -> TP Configuration option.6. The dialogs of the following figure appears: ED 01 SC. J1 Path Trace. VC-4 TTP (140 Mbit/s PDH) VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH) Mod VC-4 TTP (matrix resource) The main parameters are: • • C2 Signal Label: "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".14. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 192/399 .1 High Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected. a dialog appears for the configuration of the main parameters of the objects. 1 J1 Path Trace Operative only on VC-4 in current release. it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal). If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes.TTI Enable .6. the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 193/399 . With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as: . Received fields are read only.1. Figure 157. Passing on and copying of this document. High Order TP Configuration 14.TTI Disable ED 01 SC. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 194/399 ED . Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. Figure 158.1.TTI Repeated The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace.707 recommendations for the C2 Signal Label: • • • • • 0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 2: TUG structure 3: Locked TU-n 4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte 01 SC. TP Significant Byte Default value Table 2. They can display the following number. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label VC-4 TTP / AU4 CTP VC-4 TTP VC3-TTP (SDH) (PDH) C2 C2 C2 2 18 4 VC-12 TTP V5 2 Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. enter the default manually according to the following table All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.. J1 hexadecimal editor (example) 14. according the G.2 C2 Signal Label Received. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. To replace modified with the default.6. Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value. DQDB 21: FDDI. expected and transmitted trail trace and it allows the operator to change only the values of expected and transmitted trail trace. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1) 14. Passing on and copying of this document.2 J0 Section Trace management Select RST block and then select Port -> TP Configuration The fields of the following figure appears: Figure 159.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 195/399 . In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • • All rights reserved. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. This dialog shows the current values for received. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. J0 Configuration This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration.• • • • 18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte 19: ATM 20: MAN. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring. ED 01 SC. The received trail trace is read-only. Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field.6. Not operative in current release. The following dialogs appears: Figure 160. The main parameters are: • • All rights reserved.3 Low Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected.6.14. Passing on and copying of this document. Low Order TP Configuration Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 196/399 . a dialog to configure the main parameters of the following objects: • VC-12 TTP. J2 Path Trace. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. V5 Signal Label. "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific". Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace. Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace One repeated byte allows setting one byte that will be repeated Received fields are read only.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 197/399 . according the G. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring. ED 01 SC.2 V5 Signal Label Received. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1) To replace modified with the default. J2 hexadecimal editor 14. it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal).All rights reserved.707 recommendations for the V5 Signal Label: • • • • • 0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 2: Asynchronous 3: Bit Synchronous 4: Byte Synchronous In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • • Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value.3. Figure 161. They can display the following number. Passing on and copying of this document.6.1 J2 Path Trace Not operative in current release. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes.6. 14. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long. Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by the NE. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. enter the default manually according to the value reported in Table 2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3. 14. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: . Figure 162.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activate."Framed Signal Mode" that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This command is available for: .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 198/399 . the user can choose one of the following value: • "Not Framed" (G. This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access and G.P12 Select the Transmission -> TP Frame Mode Configuration option TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" and "Synchronization" view menu. Passing on and copying of this document.704 frame management.703/G. ED 01 SC. The following dialog appears: All rights reserved. VCi) threshold and of the Signal Degrade (SD on MST. defect detection and consequent action.Consecutive Bad Seconds: 2 to 10 ED 01 SC.Burst Parameters . . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.704): the behavior according to ETS 300-233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state. VC) threshold of the TP's related counted primitives. Figure below.Threshold : 10-3 to 10-5 Enable Consequent Actions: fixed to enables ."CRC4 Mode" that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: All rights reserved. Select the MST or the VCi block Select the Transmission -> TP Threshold Configuration option.• • • "Framed without PRA" (G.Burst distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of error frames and the total a amount of bad block per frame.ExBER . Will be opened.Threshold: 10-5 to 10-9 .Signal Degrade .Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER on MST.8 TP Threshold Configuration This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCi layer. Passing on and copying of this document. . • • "Enabling": enable or disable the CRC-4 error counting "Remote Indication": red-only field that indicates if status of CRC-4 error counting functionality of far-end NE is enabled or disabled - "Frame Status" that reports an indication of the received signal: • • "No indication" "The 2Mb/s signal is multi-frame" Press OK to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog 14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 199/399 . The user can select one of the two different Defect distributions: . .Burst Parameters . "Framed with PRA" : PRA function are activated "Framed with leased line PRA" a proprietary leased line behavior is a applied.Threshold: 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000 . Degraded Signal Threshold selection Click on OK to confirm the chosen parameters. depending on whether a TP is terminated or not. Passing on and copying of this document.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP Select the Transmission -> Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option. 14.All rights reserved. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP was not already structured. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP.9. Figure 163. 14.1 Terminate TP Use this action to terminate a path. Only one command in the menu is available.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 200/399 . A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4 TTP (= bTP) is created. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP: If the TP is already cross-connected a error message appears. 10 Monitoring Operations Select the Transmission -> Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure. in the same order as above listed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The commands of this menu item are for the management of the POM/SUT /TC (Path Overhead Monitoring.14. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. All rights reserved. Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are present.2 Disterminate TP Use this action to disterminate a path. NOTE: the “ Disterminate”action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying signals. 14. This command is available for: • • • AU-4 CTP TU-3 CTP TU-12 CTP 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 201/399 ED . Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.9. such as: • Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs • POM / HPOM operations • Lower order Connections • Higher order Connections • Lower/Higher order Path Terminations • Loop–backs on lower TPs Thus the deletion of every operation/connection/termination is necessary. Supervised Unequipped Termination and Tandem Connection). The related cross-connection is deleted. in order to confirm the TP distermination . Passing on and copying of this document. A box message will be presented. before disterminating a TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. not operative in current release. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters: • • Before Matrix (available only on AU-4 CTP) After Matrix The Supervisory Unequipped Termination. Passing on and copying of this document. The dialog shown in the following Figure below opens All rights reserved. Figure 164.1 Creation/Deletion The dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion.14.10.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 202/399 . has the following parameters: • • • • Sink (before matrix) Sink (after matrix) Source Bidirectional The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters: • Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM): TCM Before Matrix TCM After Matrix • Tandem Connection Termination (TCT): TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) 14. N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Configuration Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion dialog. the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner: Figure 166. It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP even if neither Path Overhead Monitor nor Tandem Connection was created before (SUT isn't available in this release).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 203/399 . the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner: All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. No changes can be made in this case and the values displayed can be ignored. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection Termination. not all sections of the dialog are available. Figure 165.10.- TCT Bidirectional After Matrix Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not with Ok applied changes. When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring.B. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 204/399 . The following TTI Definitions are available: • • • TTI Expected TTI Received without the display TTI Sent The following TTI Types are available: • • • TTI Enabled TTI Disabled TTI Repeated Byte Error Distribution Poisson and Burst error distribution are supported TCM/TCT Cons Actions It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT sink and bidirectional.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Figure 167. Monitor Configuration TTI Definition The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. 11 Structure TPs Select the Transmission -> Structure TPs option. • Burst Consecutive Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Burst Degrade Consecutive. if a VC-4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12 is chosen. e. Passing on and copying of this document. Unequipped Trail Not available 14. Alarm Timing Rising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN. • Burst Degrade Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Burst Degrade threshold. the signal is structured down to 63 TU-12 CTPs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 205/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The level that is selected defines how the signal is to be structured. The following menu items represent all those possible: ED 01 SC.g.Thresholds Set the thresholds of the following parameters: • Signal Degrade Poisson mode only: from 10-5 to 10-9. • Excessive Error Poisson mode only: from 10-3 also if presented a selection from 10-3 to 10-5 All rights reserved. This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected TP. 12. for commissioning or maintenance purposes. VC-12. TU-3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The loopback architecture provides four configurations .• • • • • TU-2. The loopback commands are used to separate the communication network into independent part checking the line/equipment functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation. Modifiable VC-4 TTP: TU-3. Not supported.1 Loopback Configuration The loopbacks can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal equipment level. VC-3/VC-4. Not supported. TU-12.12 Loopback The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback commands. 14. The following items are available for synchronous TPs: • • • All rights reserved. Line Loopback And Continue Line Loopback And AIS Internal Loopback And Continue Internal Loopback and AIS ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. TU-12 TUG-2: TU-12. TU-12 TUG-3: TU-3. 14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 206/399 . Not supported. Loopback configurations Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration Loopbacks act on the following TPs: • PDH board (only from the Port View): .All rights reserved.Internal loopback performed on: • • • • P12 for 2Mbit/s CTP P31 for 34/45Mbit/s CTP P4 for 140Mbit/s CTP SDH board: ED 01 SC.Line loopback performed on: • P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 207/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 168. e. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Opens. etc.1N. L-4.Internal loopback performed on: All rights reserved.Line loopback performed on: • • EIS for electrical STM-1 SPI OpS for optical STM-1. STM-4. L-4.) . STM-16 SPI .2N.The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym ending with a "N" letter (i. S-4. STM-16 ports Select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Port Loopback Configuration option.1N. P4S1N. STM-4. ED 01 SC. • MsT TTP for STM-1. Passing on and copying of this document. Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 208/399 . Figure below. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 209/399 . Port Loopbacks View Choose the TP clicking on the "Choose TP" button. ED 01 SC. 14.12. Select the TP where to apply the loopback command. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 169.2 Loopback Management To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Loopback Management option.All rights reserved. For this NE the "Timed Loopbacks" field is not managed and thus Start/Stop loopbacks time is not editable. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Loopback Management can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu and from the "Configuration menu Figure below. ED 01 SC. Opens.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 210/399 .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 211/399 . Enable the filter through the "Toggle Filter" Enable/Disable button. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Follow the previously paragraph indications to create a new loopback configuration. The "Delete" command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current loopbacks Table: select a loopback in the list and click on the "Delete" button. subrack. The "Create" command permits to create a new loopback configuration: clicking on "Create" the previous figure opens. OpS (SPI/PPI Optical). Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 170. Click on the "Search" button to start the configured loopback research into the current loopback table. MST and so on. Loopback Management The configured loopback are listed into the current loopbacks table.All rights reserved. This table can be managed by the "Search" criteria. For "Initial TP" has to be intended the outgoing signal while for "Destination TP" the incoming signal. port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical). • • • Search Criteria (operative): to configure the filter select the "Loop and Continue" type (Yes= Loop And Continue. The activated loopbacks are signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures: ED 01 SC. No= Loop And AIS) then select the "Directionality" Internal or Line and edit the Initial TP Id (write: rack. board. "Delete" and "Create" commands. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 171. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.13 Physical Media Select the Transmission -> Physical Media option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 212/399 .All rights reserved. Loopback Transmission View 14. Loopback Port View Figure 172. TX Quality Configuration.NT Configuration Not operative . .Single Fiber Configuration. The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP. . Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 213/399 .ALS Management.13.HDSL Configuration Not operative . . It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TP's type (for the option common with the "Port view" reference is made to the relevant paragraph): .Line Length Configuration. Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present the following view: The dialog-box contains the following fields: ED 01 SC. P (PPI) for PDH port.Show Optical Configuration.Regeneration Section management Not operative . .Set Domain.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. .Extra traffic Not operative . . Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port.1 Set Domain This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the selected TP.X21 Configuration Not operative 14. OpS for Optical SDH port. RM. ED 01 SC. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.14 Navigation Commands 14.14. SY. The different domains could be assigned to different operators. The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection). Set Domain 14. Figure 173. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i. NPOS . Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 214/399 . • All rights reserved.• NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the list. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. Resource domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list.1 Expand Select the Transmission -> Expand option. EML) that work on the NE. having in charge the TP.e. Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. assigning it to the TP. OK button is used to validate the selection. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. Show all upper TPs.All rights reserved.2 Hide Select the Transmission -> Hide option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.14. This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the selected TP. which belong to the physical port that is actually connected to the TP. These may be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs. ED 01 SC. Show next level of upper TPs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 215/399 . Show all lower TPs. 14. • • • • Show next level of lower TPs. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. The Board View appears.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 216/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Board View 14.This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP and the deletion of a selected TP. 14. Selected TPs.14. This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports the TP. All rights reserved. • • • Lower TPs. Figure 174.4 Navigate to Port View Select the Transmission -> Navigate to Port View option.14.3 Show Supported Board Select the Transmission -> Show Supported Board option. Upper TPs. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View related to the selected TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly. Figure 175. All rights reserved. as for the following figure: ED 01 SC. The Port View appears.14. The HOA port displays the internal structure of the payload. Port View 14. then click on Transmission –> Navigate to Port View option. Passing on and copying of this document.5 Navigate to HOA Port After selected a structured VC or TU.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 217/399 . 3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 176. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Navigate to HOA Port 3AL 98168 ADAA 218/399 .All rights reserved. With the pointer ED 01 SC. The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on crossconnections: • • • • • • • • • • • • • "Multiplex Structures for SDH" gives an overview on the SDH technology "Definition of Termination Points" gives an overview about the termination points implemented on the NE "Cross-Connection Types" provides information concerning cross-connection types supported by the NE "Cross-Connection Protection" provides information concerning cross-connection protection supported by the NE "Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections" details the complete procedure to realize cross-connection "Cross-Connections Management" details the contents of the main crossconnections view "Create/Modify Cross-Connections" describes the creation and modification of cross-connections "Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections" describes the activation. Not supported in current release. 34 Mbit/s. Passing on and copying of this document. Activation and deactivation not supported in current release. manual.15 Cross-Connection Management 15. All rights reserved.g. deactivation and deletion of cross-connections. e.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 219/399 . lockout protection) on cross-connections "Print" deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files "Port Switch Over" not operative.1. A byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead (POH) is added to the Container (C) generated. "Protection Switching" deals with switching actions (force. "Split and Join Cross-Connections" describes how to split or join bidirectional crossconnections. 15. "Show Cross-Connected TPs" describes the possibility of showing connections between two or more TPs of different hierarchies. Synchronous multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC) pack signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH). matching the European with the American standard. 45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according to a predefined structure. The SDH signal structure contains an extended overhead as well as a fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements. certain filling algorithms are available. a standardized transmission has been created. Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals. The STM-1 signal structure is achieved by using the multiplex structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI. To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual Container (VC).1 Overview The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level path.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).1. Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s.1 Introduction 15. thus improving the possibilities of the network management. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. connection between au4 and vc4. 709 The STM-1 frame consists of: • • • A Section Overhead (SOH) An AU Pointer area A payload area ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 220/399 . together with the Section Overhead (SOH). finally makes up the STM-1 frame. an Administrative Unit (AU) or .if several Containers of a group are to be combined . All rights reserved.pointing to the start of the VC. The AU of the signal. in respect of the STM-1 frame. Figure 177. Several TUs form a Tributary Unit Group (TUG) and TUGs again can be combined into a VC.a Tributary Unit (TU) is generated. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G. Passing on and copying of this document. These Virtual Containers are of different size and may be nested or packed differently. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155.All rights reserved.520 Mbit/s. A VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3. ED 01 SC. Figure 178. A single user channel is packed into a Virtual Container. Each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 221/399 . Each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2. Virtual Containers for the European bit rates: • • • • The STM-1 frame contains a VC-4. Passing on and copying of this document. An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of: • • • • • • • • • • Either 1 x VC-4 Or 3 x VC-3 Or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 Or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12 Or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2 Or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 Or 21 x VC-2 Or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 Or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12 Or 63 x VC-12. For example an STM-16 signal of 2.. The signal is monitored and passed on after modification in one form or another.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 222/399 . As a rule.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) When ports are depicted on the user interface. TU-12CTP. • TTP (Trail Termination Point) The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment. The Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included. • CTP (Connection Termination Point) The CTP represents the termination of a connection.e. the received signal is monitored and the error signaling evaluated. i.520 Mbit/s.g.STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of 155. This section concerns the multiplex structure as well as on the information model of object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface. TU-3CTP The TU-x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection. 15. • CTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: • AU4 (au4 Connection Termination Point) The AU-4CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection. while own-code signaling is inserted in the transmitted signal. a Termination Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission segment. Passing on and copying of this document. the following abbreviations are used.1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included. A distinction is made between the following types of TPs: All rights reserved. Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level.320 Mbit/s is generated by combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte interleaved. TU-2CTP. The transmission signal is "terminated".488. • CTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: • E4 (Connection Termination Point) The E4-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 140 Mbit/s PPI • S4 (Connection Termination Point) ED 01 SC. e. • TU-x (Connection Termination Point). (monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • S1 (Connection Termination Point) The S1-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI.The S4-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 140 Mbit/s PPI • E32 (Connection Termination Point) The E32-CTP represents represent the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 45 Mbit/s PPI • All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. • OS (Optical Section TTP) An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). Passing on and copying of this document. The Mon. The Mon.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 223/399 . S32 (Connection Termination Point) The S32-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 45 Mbit/s PPI • E31 (Connection Termination Point) The E31-CTP represents represent the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 34 Mbit/s PPI • S31 (Connection Termination Point) The S31-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 34 Mbit/s PPI • E1 (Connection Termination Point) The E1-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI. (Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. • TTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: • ES (Electrical Section TTP) An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). . a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. i. An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH (Multiplexer Section Overhead). i. • E2 (Trail Termination Point) The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 8 Mbit/s connection. a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. • VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. • E4 (Trail Termination Point) The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s connection. Depending on the type. • E3 (Trail Termination Point) The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s connection.e. rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s. a 45MBit/s. • P (pPI Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side. Depending on the type. Passing on and copying of this document. it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s.e. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.. rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. an PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous side.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 224/399 . a pPITTP corresponds to the esTTP of the synchronous side.• RST (Regenerator Section TTP) An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH (Regenerator Section Overhead). • MST (Multiplexer Section TTP) All rights reserved. • TTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: • PPI (Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side. a 45 Mbit/s. • VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) ED 01 SC. the working and protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4-CTP) enter in the switching selector.A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. All rights reserved. . • VC-3 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-3 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-3 path. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Receive side.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 225/399 . ED 01 SC. The MSNP-TTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF and the MSP protocol failure.MSP definition Transmit side. the MSNP (AU4-CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unprotected CTP) sources and then the MSN-TTP working and protection sources (to insert the K1-K2 bytes) are sent to the own SPI interfaces. • VC-12 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-12 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-12 path. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 179.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. SDH Transport Level Diagram 3AL 98168 ADAA 226/399 . Figure 180. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The following tables list the TP names mapping conventions in the " Transmission" View.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 227/399 . PDH TPs ITU-T TP names on 1662SMC PPITTP P E4 CTP eCTP S4 CTP p4 E31 CTP eCTP S31 CTP p31 E32 CTP eCTP S32 CTP p32 E1 CTP eCTP S1 CTP p12Mon E4 TTP not supported E3 TTP not supported E2 TTP not supported VC-4 TTP Vc4 VC-3 TTP Vc3 VC-12 TTP Vc12 ED 01 SC.1. PDH Transport Level Diagram 15. Therefore they differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T recommendations. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names The TP names on the 1662SMC reflect the software model the user interface is based on. Table 3. Passing on and copying of this document. The configuration of both matrix copies is always identical.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s) mapped to Virtual Containers (VCs). there is no routing in reverse direction. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 228/399 . VC-2 or VC-12 level and transfers the VCs to the relevant I/O boards via GTI. The matrix performs the cross-connection on the VC-4.707. The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. VC-3.1. On the I/O boards.5.1. The incoming signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards. based on quality. Alcatel's standardized signal format for internal interfaces. called the matrix port.5 Cross-Connection Types A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and output of the matrix.1 Unidirectional Connection Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (point-to-point). It enables the transport of all signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1. This frame is based on the STM-1 frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G. 15. bidirectional and broadcast connections unprotected as well as protected. is similar to the STM-1 format. The NE supports unidirectional. 15. Unidirectional Connection ED 01 SC.Table 4. Figure 181. one GTI signal is selected from Copy A or Copy B. The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the GTI. The Generic Transport Interface GTI. SDH TPs ITU-T ESTTP OSTTP RSTTP MSTTP MSP AU-4 CTP AU-4-4c CTP VC-4 TTP TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-3 CTP TU-2 CTP TU-12 CTP TP names on 1662SMC ElS OpS RST MST MSP Au4/Au4P Au4P-4c Vc4 Tug3 Tug2 Tu3 Tu2 Tu12 All rights reserved. B and C on three legs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 229/399 . a broadcast connection consist of one source and several sinks. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. All rights reserved. the system automatically switches to the protection path from protection ED 01 SC. In the case of a failure. In the example below.5.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint) In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point). No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg. N. different `legs' that share the same source TP. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are exhausted.5. Bidirectional Connection 15.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route).2 Bidirectional Connection Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions (point-topoint). Figure 182. Figure 183.15.B.6. information is broadcast from one input to outputs A.1. 15. one source and one sink.1.1. Passing on and copying of this document.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection 15. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.B.6.6.Input Protected N.3 Protected Broadcast Connection The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent. locked out or switched independently. Bidirectional Connection . Input A (input protected) can be protected: Figure 185.B. Each protection can be forced. ED 01 SC. This second connection is permanently kept in hot standby operation. 15.1. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection. 15. protected.Input B to the Output.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route). it is possible that only some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the protection input. if a failure occurs at a certain input.Input Protected N.1. Bidirectional Connection . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Therefore. unidirectional connections using the same pair of input termination points. Figure 184.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 230/399 . By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection. Drop and Continue . All the connections are created in a single step of configuration. Output C is protected. Figure 187.6. Leg 2 and 3 are protected via input B. Figure 186. Protected Broadcast Figure up. when receive from Input Protecting main the connection is defined inverse. Three main cases have been considered: • An high order signal cross connection (AU4) 01 SC. A unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 231/399 ED .All rights reserved.Normal 15. when receive from Input main the connection is defined normal.4 Drop and Continue Connection A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: • • • A unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to Input protecting B. In current release only one out of N legs can be protected. A unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections This paragraph lists general procedure to realize cross-connection moving among the various menus. Passing on and copying of this document. B and C.1. 15. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. whereas leg 1 is not protected. Shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. a new window called "TP search" is opened.• • An high order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4c) A low order signal cross connection (example : TU12) Procedure for high order signal (AU4) • • • All rights reserved. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. in the "Termination Points" field select the concatenated AU4c (syntax example: r01sr1sl08/port#01#01AU4P-4c) Click on "OK". Procedure low order signal (example TU12) • Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu 01 ED SC. • • • • • Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" ""Cross Connection Management" Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management windows. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. the "TP search" window is closed. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. • • • • • • • • Select "Transmission" option from the "Views" menu Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management" Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management window. Before to create an AU4 concatenated cross-connection is necessary to define that the AU4s on a STM-4 board are concatenated as explained. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new cross-connection created.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 232/399 . In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new cross-connection created. In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. the "TP search" window is closed. in the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 Click on "OK".B. Passing on and copying of this document. Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4c) N. a new window called "TP search" is opened. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. Repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. a new window called "Cross Connection Management" is opened. Select "Transmission" " "Terminate TP" . Port view is presented with the View " Equipment pull down menu. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. • • • • • • • • • If TU12 (example) are selected. The VC4 is automatically choose and indicated as "port # n". then clicking on the presented objects with the sequence board>port. where "n" is the VC4 number. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new cross-connection created. Passing on and copying of this document. In the "Cross Connection Management" window click on "Create" button. a cross is displayed on the AU4 block Click twice on the AU4 block and on the VC4 block that appears. In the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 and click on "OK".1. Transmission view is presented with the View " Transmission pull down menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The AU4 is then terminated on a VC4 of the matrix circuit of the COMPACT ADM unit. in the transmission window clicking twice on the TUG3 and TUG2 blocks the TU12 are displayed Select the TU12 to be used Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management". The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via Configuration menu . a new window called "TP search" is opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 233/399 . ED 01 SC.1) Click on "OK".B. the "TP search" window is closed. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. In the "Termination Points" field select the structured TP (example: TU12 1.3 Cross-Connections management A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. • • • All rights reserved. a new window called "Tp search" is opened. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. In the transmission window the AU4 block is displayed.• Select "Transmission" ""Add TP". then selecting the showed TUG3 Select "Transmission" " "Structure TPs" " then selecting the structure N. This connection will appear on the Cross Connection Management view in a independent line. 15. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 234/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. 3. ED 01 SC.) Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E= connection made with 1353SH. A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog after selecting the Search command. Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog. if at least one ACD is defined on the NE and one or more cross-connections are assigned to this ACD(s). There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections: • • All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 235/399 . Cross connection management cascade menu The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty.1 Search Criteria • Name (not supported. M= connection made with 1354RM.) Number of the cross-connection (automatically assigned) • ACD (not supported. empty= connection made with CT.Figure 188. Do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list of all existing cross-connections. 15. • Type Select the connection type: • • • • • Unidirectional Bidirectional Multipoint Drop Continue Protection Select protection functionality: • • • Protected Not protected TP Class Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection. Enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to display a selection of cross-connections. Set Ignore for attributes not to be used as filtering criteria. This filter option can only be used. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. State Select the protection state: • All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Switch to Input Auto.• State Select the connection state: • • Activated Deactivated (not operative in current release. The # within brackets identifies a number. Switch to Protecting Lockout Normal I Normal P TP ID Prefix Enter the TP type and physical location of the port.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. according to the following format: R<rack#>s<subr. ED 01 SC. • • • • • • • • • • Forced to Input Forced to Protecting Manual Switch to Input Manual Switch to Protecting Auto.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 236/399 . the connection state is always Activated) Prot. or only the physical location at least down to board level. Passing on and copying of this document. Auto.All rights reserved. The list contains information concerning the following parameters for each cross-connection: • Prot. ED 01 SC. a read only list of cross-connections matching the search criteria appears. Lockout.3. State Detailed switching information in the format: <Protection state> <traffic Ind> (<location>: <signal state>-<switch status>. The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the upper left corner of the list.2 Cross-Connection List After a successful search. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 237/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. Forced or Manual. • <Traffic ind> Indicates the location of current traffic: P (Protecting input) or I (Input). Figure 189. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) 15. [<Location>: <signal state>-<switch status>]) • <Protection state> Normal. • State Connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A (activated) or D (deactivated) • Dir. <port#>#TP The # within brackets identifies a number.• <Location> Indicates the location of the error signal: P (Protecting input) or I (Input) • <Signal state> Indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure) All rights reserved. bi(directional) or mp (multipoint). The # within brackets identifies a number. Direction-related connection type: uni (directional). The switch was completed. contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format <Rack#>-<subr. DC_N (Drop & Continue Normal) or DC_I (Drop & Continue Inverse) • Input Signal source. contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format r<rack#>s<subr. • <Switch status> Status of the switch: C (completed) or p (pending) Example: Auto I (P: SD-c) There has been an Auto matic switch from the protecting input to the I nput where the traffic is currently located. • Protecting Input Protecting source (for protected cross-connections only). #>-<Board#>-<port#>.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. Passing on and copying of this document. The reason for the automatic switch was Signal Degrade in the Protecting input.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 238/399 . • Output ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 239/399 ED . 01 SC. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time. Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously pressing the <Control> key. Before starting any action apart from creation or printing. for multi-leg cross-connections. Passing on and copying of this document. Signal destination for point-to-point cross-connections. mark at least one cross-connection.3 Actions available The following actions are available: • Create a cross-connection. Or. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) 15. select the first cross-connection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a mouse click while pressing the <Shift> key.All rights reserved. the string "multiple Legs" appears instead. Figure 190. the TP ID of the destination is specified according to the format r<rack#>s<subr.3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed. A confirmation dialog pops up in this case and the user has to confirm the requested action. mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button while pressing the <Control> key.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP . At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed crossconnections. To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession. press the <Shift> key and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer to the last entry. • Deactivate a Cross-Connection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The Main CrossConnection dialog is opened. • Protection Switching. Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the list. Not operative. Not operative. • Modify a Cross-Connection. Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main CrossConnection dialog. • Delete a Cross-Connection. The dialog box of Figure below is presented ( “ Main Cross Connection”view). • Activate a Cross-Connection. Passing on and copying of this document. Not operative. All rights reserved. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. • Split a Cross-Connection.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 240/399 . ED 01 SC. Available if two cross connections are selected. The Protection Actions dialog is opened. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view as for the following menus example or by using the Create or Modify buttons in the CrossConnection Management dialog. • Print. • Join Cross-Connections.The Main Cross-Connection dialog is opened. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. The dialog has to be closed explicitly. Prints the filtered list of cross-connections. 15. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters. To create a cross-connection. the OK button is insensitive when this cross-connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned to the user profile. Gives an overview about the optional and ED 01 SC. Table 1. 15. To prevent operation faults. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Only those parameters. which depend on the connection and protection type. one or more of those parameters must be defined according to the cross-connection type.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 241/399 .1 Cross-Connection Parameters The "Main Cross Connection" permits to create the cross connections. the system verifies that the relevant TPs can be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the user profile) after the OK button is pressed. which are permitted within the current context.All rights reserved. the corresponding message box appears. Passing on and copying of this document. If a specified TP is not permitted. All others are disabled (faded gray).4. The subsystem provides a confirmation dialog box before the operation can be executed. If the window displays an existing cross-connection. can be accessed. the system is designed according to the following guidelines: • • • All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. If the window is used to create a new cross-connection. The following SNCP Type is available: • • • SNCP-I (Inherently monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) SNCP-N (Non-intrusively monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) SNCP-S (Sub-layer Sub-Network Connection Protection) (Not operative in current release) ED 01 SC. • • • • Unidirectional Bidirectional Drop Continue D&C Topology Select the direction for Drop Continue: • • • Normal Inverse Protection Define protection state: • • • Protected Not Protected Prot. Criteria (only available for protected connections) Clicking on the Prot.mandatory input parameters for the various cross-connection types. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with the mouse. Criteria button. Passing on and copying of this document. where the user can display and configure the SNCP Type Protection. Configurable Parameters • Type Select the connection type: All rights reserved. No protection criteria for automatic protection switching can be configured. for the Protection Criteria dialog is opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 242/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. • HOT (available only for protected connections) Not operative in current release To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. the Wait To Restore protection period prevents several protection switches being initiated as a result of an intermittent failure. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. In Non-revertive mode.All rights reserved. When Revertive mode is active. switchover to the protecting element is maintained even after the fault has been eliminated. Otherwise. In Revertive mode. The protected element must be error-free during this defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. The Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 243/399 ED . a protected service is switched back to its initial. Figure 191. HOT is the time between declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. Protection Criteria • Revertive (available only for protected connections) Select whether protection is to be revertive or not. • Prot. protected element when the fault has been eliminated. Input 01 SC. • Input To enter the input TP. and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.To enter the protecting TP.B. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. To delete a leg from the list. • Output It is possible to enter one or more output TPs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 244/399 . Table 5. The previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box located below. Passing on and copying of this document. Click the Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg. N. To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection. Otherwise. Otherwise. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation Input Parameters Type D&C Topology Protection Protection Criteria HOT (NOT operative) Protected Revertive Input Protecting Input Output Unidirectional/Bidirectional Cross Connection Not Protected Protected Unidirectional/Bidirectional Normal/inverse Not Protected Protected _ SNCP-1 SNCP-N _ X _ _ One TP _ One TP _ X One TP One TP One TP Broadcast Cross Connection Not Protected Protected Unidirectional _ _ Not Protected Protected _ SNCP-1 SNCP-N _ X _ _ One TP _ One or more TPs _ _ One TP One TP One or more TPs All rights reserved. _ not available x configuration optional Non-configurable Parameters • CC Topology ED 01 SC. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. A list of all the selected output TPs is displayed in the list box located below it. proceed as described previously and press button Add afterwards . select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Otherwise. Repeat this procedure for each destination TP. To enter one output TP. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. protected Broadcast. not protected Broadcast with one protected leg Drop & Continue normal Drop & Continue inverse Loopback connection: unidirectional.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 245/399 .The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. the color of an icon indicates the connection state of the crossconnection: Green -> active Brown -> inactive All rights reserved. In addition. The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection: TPs not cross connected Unidirectional. not protected Unidirectional. The left-hand icon displays the current topology and the right one displays a view of the topology following confirmation of the current modifications. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. not protected Bidirectional. Passing on and copying of this document. protected Bidirectional. same input and output TP ED 01 SC. 3) Select or type in the input TP. The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok.2 Create a Cross-Connection This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using The "Main Cross Connection" For a detailed description of the single parameters. 4) Select or type in the output TP as described in Step 3). To enter the TP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 246/399 . Non-Protected Cross-Connection -. Creation of a Unidirectional.g.Input TTI The received Trail Trace Identifier of the far end signal is displayed.Criteria) 8) The Hot (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release ED 01 SC. Cross-Connection Icons Example: All rights reserved. After creation of a cross-connection.Output TTI The Trail Trace Identifier of the transmitted (near end) signal is displayed.B. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. Figure 193. E. For information on cross-connection types. or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. 2) Select the protection state. Not operative in the current Release.4.Figure 192. the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. The matching TPs are listed in the right list box. Passing on and copying of this document. -. The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections: 5) Select or type in the protection TP as described in Step 3). then select the filter criteria Connection State "not connected" and Class "AU-4" and click on button Search. 15. 6) Configure the Revertive mode 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4 TPs of a rack.or bidirectional) 1) Select the cross-connection type. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog. first select the rack in the left list box. Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (unit. N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Not operative in the current Release. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 247/399 . ED 01 SC. Figure 194. Passing on and copying of this document.Press the button Ok to confirm the creation. All rights reserved. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection Create a Broadcast Connection 1) Select the cross-connection type "unidirectional" 2) Select the protection state. 3) Select or type in the input TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. To unprotect a leg from the list. then select the filter criteria Connection State "Ignore" and Class "TU12" and click on button Search TPs.g. select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. The matching TPs are listed in the right list box. Passing on and copying of this document. This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria.To enter the TP. E. ED 01 SC.Criteria) 8) The HOT (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release Press the button Ok to confirm creation. Note that each single protected leg of the broadcast has to be assigned to the same protecting input. Repeat this procedure for each protected output TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release). Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections: 5) Select or type in the protection input TP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 248/399 . 6) Configure the criteria for automatic protection switching. 4) Select or type in the output TPs as described in Step 3 ) Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output TPs are displayed in the list box under the output field. The leg is then marked as "protected" in the list box. first select the board in the left list box. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Afterwards. to obtain a list of all TU12 TPs of a board. To delete a leg from the list. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. select the protected output TP in the output list box and click button Protect Leg. Proceed as described in Step 3 ). select the protected TP in the list box and click on the Unprotect Leg button. 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. 3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 195. Search for Cross-Connection Output 3AL 98168 ADAA 249/399 .All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection 3AL 98168 ADAA 250/399 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 196. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection 3AL 98168 ADAA 251/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 197. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter. note that some of the transformations involved may affect traffic (because the system may have to destroy and re-create the cross-connection to perform the necessary transformation). Table 6.e.15. X configuration optional The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying connections.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 252/399 . An example is in the following Figure. Input) as the only signal source of the new unprotected cross-connection.4. For a description of the parameters.1 on page 2. i. a question box appears.e.B. Modifiable Parameters Input Parameters Modification Not Protected to Protected Protected to not Protected Type _ _ D&C Topology Normal/inverse Normal/inverse Protection Protected Not Protected Protection Criteria X _ HOT (NOT operative) X _ Unprotected _ X Protected X _ Revertive X _ Input X X Protecting Input X _ Output X X _ Not available All rights reserved. For an overview of the accessible parameter when the protection state has been changed from "not protected" to "protected" and vice versa. Refer to Table 2. please refer to the previous Para. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. a confirmation window warns the user. Ensure that the active TP is selected (i. 1.1. the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. After modification of a cross-connection. check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog). N. In addition. Within the Main Cross Connection dialog. modification of a cross-connection is restricted to the protection state and the parameters required by the protection. the dialog displays the additional option button Unprotected. It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the protecting input TP (Prot. the user is required to confirm operations affecting traffic.3 Modify a Cross-Connection When modifying a cross-connection. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. asking the user to confirm the unprotect action.. To modify a cross connection selects one from the connection list and then click on the Modify button. Unprotect a protected cross-connection: When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection changed to "not protected"). the Prot. Input button is available to select the protection input connection to insert.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. An example is in the following Figure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 253/399 . Figure 198. Passing on and copying of this document. Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection • Protect an unprotected cross-connection: When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected. 5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections 15. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Activate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release.5. Figure 199. Passing on and copying of this document. To activate a cross-connection. The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a selection of existing cross-connections. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection 15. select one from the connection list (see) and then click on the Activate button to initiate the process.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 254/399 .All rights reserved. The connection state (Act = A or D) is indicated in this connection list. 5. in the same order as above listed. 15. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. After creation. such as: • Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs • POM / HPOM operations • Lower order Connections • Higher order Connections • Lower/Higher order Path Terminations • Loop–backs • LAN/LAPD (and any comm/routing channel) • Auxiliary channels Thus the deletion of every active operation/connection/termination is necessary.5. To deacti vate a cross-connection.3 Delete a Cross-Connection Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. which we re selected.the state change request. clicking the Activate button only initiates actions on the deactivated cross-connections. 15. If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated cross-connections. before the deletion of a cross–connection. clicking the Deactivate button only initiates actions on the activated cross-connections. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list when the operation is successful. a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. 15. To prevent operation errors. which were selected. However. Passing on and copying of this document. the user must confirm the deletion request. 15. deletion of active crossconnections is possible. select one from the connection list and then click on the Deactivate button to initiate the process. Split All rights reserved. If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated cross-connections. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D). To delete a cross-connection.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 255/399 . select the corresponding connection from the list and click on the Delete button.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections Not supported in current release.1 Split a Cross-Connection Precondition Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split. ED 01 SC. NOTE: the “ Delete cross–connection”action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying supported signals. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A).6. The cross-connections are split without further confirmation from the user. the split action has the following effect: a) Unprotected Cross-Connection An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional crossconnections with the input TP in one of them being the output in the other and vice versa (see Figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 256/399 . The input of the broadcast is the output of the original protected cross-connection. Figure 200. Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press Split. Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection.). Passing on and copying of this document. The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the old bidirectional one. The input of the original crossconnection is one of the legs in the broadcast. ED 01 SC. The user has to press Search to see the new cross connections. The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The other leg in the broadcast is the protecting input. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection b) Protected Cross-Connection Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional crossconnection and one broadcast with two legs.All rights reserved. i. Figure 201.All rights reserved. Join Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press the Join button. and the other one a broadcast with two legs. Restriction: the input of the broadcast connection has to be the output of the protected connection and the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of the unidirectional connection. Press Search to see the new crossconnections in the list. unidirectional and the input is the output of the other one.2 Join Two Cross-Connections Precondition Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics: • The connections are either 1) Both unprotected.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 257/399 . Both cross-connections have the operational state "enabled".e. The result is either a bidirectional or a protected bidirectional cross-connection. The cross-connections are joined without further confirmation from the user. The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.6. effect b). also refer to Chapter Split a Cross-Connection. they are listed in black color in the Cross Connection Management dialog. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. or 2) One of them is protected and unidirectional. • • Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or deactivated). Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection 15. If the original cross-connections have different names. These are: • Force to Input (not operative in current release) The cross-connection is switched to the protected input regardless of signal quality. Force To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not with Manual Switch To Input. A second condition is that protection is enabled for the crossconnection concerned (protection parameter is set to "protected"). Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to different levels. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.7 Protection Switching The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in the Cross Connection Management dialog. All rights reserved. Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not assigned to the NML.related operations on protected cross-connections. The three protection actions Force.g. Automatic protection is disabled. 15.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 258/399 . Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a higher priority level. Protection Actions Dialog The dialog window enables the user to perform protection. Figure 202. • Force to Protecting (Input) The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal quality. whereby Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the lowest. e. Passing on and copying of this document. • Release Force ED 01 SC. Automatic protection is disabled. the new name is a concatenation of the names of both of them. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 15. • Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release) A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protected path is worse than on the protecting path. ED 01 SC.8 Print This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the related filter settings on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format. N. • Release Lock The protection lock is disabled. the list entry in the Cross Connection Management dialog is updated automatically. All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled ("grey") accordingly. Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protecting input manually.B. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protecting path is worse than on the protected path. neither forced nor manual switching can be performed. • All rights reserved. • Lock Out to Invoke The connection path is locked for protection switching. the dialog disappears automatically. Passing on and copying of this document. • Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protected input manually.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 259/399 . After completion of protection switching. After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated.Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled. i.e. Passing on and copying of this document. The user can select a TP and initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the Transmission view. ED 01 SC. Select Output Format 15. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select Printer N.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action. If no printer is installed.B.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 260/399 . there is no error message displayed to indicate this.All rights reserved. Figure 203. Figure 204. A line indicates the connection. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 261/399 . Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the currently selected TP (e. show all TPs that are above the TU12CTP) enables all the related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow can be illustrated.g. The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or selected group of TPs). Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 205. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 3AL 98168 ADAA 262/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.16 Overhead management 16.Cross-connection between 2 or more OH bytes . The possible cross-connection types are: • Unprotected bidirectional point to point The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the cross-connection are the following: • • Create the OH TPs involved in the operation Create the OH cross-connection: . Overhead cross-connection .Select the output OH TP involved in the operation After having deleted an OH cross-connection.Definition of the Phone Parameters There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port. ED 01 SC. the involved TPs have to be deleted. 16.2 OH Connection overview Here are described the possible OH connections • OH Cross-connection The operator has to be able to cross-connect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different boards. depending on the context.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 263/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. so TP could be used instead of OH bytes or auxiliary port.Select the input OH TP involved in the operation .Total Pass-through of the MSOH bytes for some cards . The possible operations are: • All rights reserved.Select type of cross-connection . • OH Termination The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel.Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel .1 Introduction The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH) bytes of the NE. ED 01 SC. • Total MSOH Pass-through For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total pass-through of the MSOH bytes. • • • • OH Cross Connection. 16.Select the created OH TP .The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are the following: • • Create the OH TP involved in the operation Create the OH byte termination: .Select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation . the following options are presented in the cascading menu. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH pass-through are the following: • • Create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation Create the total MSOH pass-through: . OH TP deleting. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. a single msoh pass-through connection or a single msoh crossconnection cannot be set.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 264/399 .Select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation After having deleted a total MSOH pass-through. A total msoh pass-through connection (connection between msPassThroughCTP points) is set-up only if no single msoh pass-through connection are set and if no single msoh cross-connection are set. If a total msoh pass-through connection is set. OH TP creation. Passing on and copying of this document. After having deleted an OH byte termination. To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu.3 Overhead views The Overhead Views allows performing the previously presented operations.Select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation All rights reserved. the involved msPassThroughCTP points have to be deleted. OH Phone Parameters. the involved TP have to be deleted. 16.4 OH Cross Connection Select the Configuration pull down menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 265/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Figure 206. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Cross Connection option. The Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog opens and allows to start the configuration. Overhead options The options are described in next paragraphs. ED 01 SC. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 266/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. also in this case already described for path management. then the same description and functions are valid. Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog and the TP Search dialog. Figure 207. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog It is similar to the dialog used for the cross-connection of the TP for paths.All rights reserved. The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created TPs. Figure 208. Deleted AFTER a cross-connection/termination deleting involving them has been confirmed.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog ED 01 SC. also to list the Supported and Not Supported operation. Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH TPs have to be: • • Created ONLY BEFORE a cross-connection/termination operation involving them has been performed. In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 267/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. For each cross connection/termination matching the filtering criteria. After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations. The create button is always enabled. The operator can set the filtering criteria. The operation buttons availability follows some rules: • The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected from the list.• Supported operations o Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of the following filtering attributes: type. The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for single items. Modify operations can be performed only on single cross connections/terminations. Passing on and copying of this document. It brings up the Main cross connection Dialog. A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation. outp ut TPs involved .1 ED 01 SC. Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at the same time. and a confirmation dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the operation.1. • • Delete the selected xconnection/termination Go to the "Main Cross Connection for Overhead" dialog and modify the existing cross connection/termination Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button. TPs . this dialog allows to: All rights reserved. the operator is warned about that. yes to all/cancel for multiple items • Not Supported operation When used for OH purposes.4. It brings up the Main cross connection dialog. When some operation may affect the existing traffic. The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation. the following information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input. can start the search and select one or more cross connections/terminations among those presented in a read-only list as a result of the search operation.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 268/399 . the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesn't support the following functionalities: • • • • Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are unprotected Activate/Deactivate cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation Split cross connection/termination Modify Cross Connection Termination Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog 16. • • The modify button is enabled if one (and only one) item is selected. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 4.703 2Mbit/s (not operative in current release). the operator can perform the operations hereafter listed: • • • All rights reserved.2 TP Search dialog The TP Search dialog currently offers: • • Navigation rack/subrack/board/port A list of TPs to choose from When used in the OH domain. some or all of the following operations are available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.See Figure up.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 269/399 . By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons.g: protections are not allowed). this dialog is a subcase of the most generic TP Search. • Supported operations o When creating a new cross connection. RS or VC class selected All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port selected and no TP class selected All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class: board/port selected and MS. Selection of the cross-connection type Selection of the input TP involved in the cross-connection Selection of the output TP involved in the cross-connection In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP Search dialog. depending on the NE type characteristics: o Choose one input TP o Choose one output TP It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on the Choose button to select a TP from the TP Search dialog box 16. some fields of this dialog are disabled. According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user. Passing on and copying of this document.1.The auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 1 The auxiliary channels are: • 2 x G. RS or VC class selected All the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type) All the OH TPs not yet connected A combination of the above options In this Network Element to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the Overhead bytes the following operative indication must be observed: . and being the OH cross connection operations a subset of those applying to the general cross connections (e. in the screen are indicated as: ED 01 SC. The operator can choose among a list of: • • • • • • All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected and MS. Passing on and copying of this document.R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v11TTP .703 64Kbit/s.R01sr1sl11/port#06-P Expanding this TP.R01sr1sl11/port#05-P Expanding this TP. 4 x G. in the screen are indicated as: .R01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v24TTP • 1 x phonic interface (voice channel).R01sr1sl11/port#07-P .R01sr1sl11/port#01-#02-q23TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v11TTP . in the screen are indicated as: .R01sr1sl11/port#08-P .R01sr1sl11/port#09-P .R01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v24TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#10-P • 4 x V11. four referred TPs are presented . 31 referred TPs are presented .R01sr1sl11/port#01-#03-q23TTP ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v24TTP . 31 referred TPs are presented • All rights reserved.R01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v11TTP • 4 x V24.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 270/399 . in the screen are indicated as: R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP Expanding this TP.R01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v11TTP . in the screen are indicated as: .R01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v24TTP . To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view double clicks on the MS. In these TPs the indication ". the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: . "UC" is for User Channel and "Pass" is for Pass through channel. The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the operator All rights reserved. Figure 209.OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created. Apply button is used to perform a create request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field. After having performed the create request.a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. RS and VC4 TP Class.1 to 9. The OH TP is present in MS. the "NU" is for National Use. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP creation option. . Passing on and copying of this document. the "FU" is for F uture Use. In detail. RS or VC4 Tp.9) The voice channel are identified by the "ow" indication.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 271/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. The OH TP creation dialog opens and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect.#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the coordinates of the Section Overhead bytes on the SDH frame (1.. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering.5 OH TP creation Select the Configuration pull down menu... Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.R01sr1sl11/port#01-#04-q23TTP . the OH Tp field is set to empty. the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only not created OH Tps. 16.The other boards used to terminate or cross-connect the OH bytes are the STM-n boards. OH TP creation ED 01 SC. 6 OH TP deleting Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP deleting option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 272/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 210. the TP Search ED 01 SC.All rights reserved.a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering. OH Search TP for creation 16. The OH TP deleting dialog opens and allows deleting the OH TP no more involved in an OH cross-connection. In detail. the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: . Opens. Select the Configuration pull down menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 273/399 . . Figure below.7 OH Phone Parameters The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and to manage the parameter "phonic extension". Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. the OH Tp field is set to empty. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 212. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Phone Parameters option. Passing on and copying of this document. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. After having performed the delete request. All rights reserved.dialog allows the operator to visualize only created and not cross-connected OH Tps. OH TP deleting 16. Figure 211.OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted. Phone Parameters dialog window ED 01 SC. Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field. The phone number field. Passing on and copying of this document. where enable or disable the extension of the selected phonic interface.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 274/399 . If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access panel of the NE.In the window are presented: • • • The interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces to be configured. to set the telephone number for operator calls on the phonic interface. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Not operative in current release Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone parameters of the selected phonic interface without close the dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. All rights reserved. The phonic extension field. 1. – Display Current Data. A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP). Examples of these counters are Error Seconds (ES) and Severely Error Seconds (SES). Passing on and copying of this document. Not operative in current release. 24h) and stores the values in history data logs. a notification (threshold crossing alarm) is issued.1 Overview These functionalities are described in the following chapters in addition to general information concerning performance monitoring on the NE. The principle performance management functions are: • • • All rights reserved. the following options are available: – Configure Performance Monitoring. Not operative in current release. Near end performance monitoring events are: • Background Block Error (BBE): A BBE counter measures the number of error blocks. 17. for future releases . Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records when predefined values are exceeded. it is not possible to start individual performance counters. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. – Display Maintenance Counter.for QoS and maintenance purpose. Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement point.2 Supported Performance Counters The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors. By selecting the GMAU TP and subsequently the Transmission >Performance menu.17 Performance Monitoring 17. The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for each TP. The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified granularity periods (15 min.1. Not operative in current release.1 Introduction The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter values for trail termination points and connection termination points. On the ETHERNET boards a set of performance counters are foreseen. where performance measurement occurs. Collection of the performance data.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 275/399 . the values of the error counters can be compared to user-defined threshold levels. ED 01 SC. • • • • • Chapter Configuration deals with the configuration of performance monitoring Chapter Display Current Data deals with displaying current performance data Chapter Display History Data deals with displaying history performance data Chapter PM Threshold Table Selection deals with the selection of threshold tables Chapter PM Threshold Table Modification/Display deals with the modification of threshold tables and permits or display the same 17. which do not occur as part of an SES. For the purpose of quality supervision. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 276/399 . PDH TPs Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH path layers. Further definitions: • • • • Error Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block are erroneous. a one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect. For the regenerator section. The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events can be counted: . only near end counting is supported. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are: All rights reserved. a one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks. which is part of the Unavailable Time. Unavailable Time (UAT): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. ED 01 SC. Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)]: indicates to a terminal that the far end terminal has detected an incoming failure. Severely Error Second (SES): A one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks. no far end information is transmitted and. Far End Error Second (FEES): Identifies. Passing on and copying of this document.SDH TPs Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive direction of the signal for all SDH path layers and for the multiplex section layer. therefore. An SES is also counted as an ES. which does not occur as part of an FESES.• • • Error Second (ES): A one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect. • • • • Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE): A far end error block. Far End Severely Error Second (FESES): Identifies. which were received by the Far End Terminal. or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)]: Identifies. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. the count of error blocks that were received by the far end terminal. which is part of the Unavailable Time at the far end. Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second. Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second. or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP) which was received/detected by the Far End Terminal. An FESES is counted as an FEE. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. at a terminal. at a terminal. at a terminal. • • Pointer Justification Event (PJE): A PJE is an inversion of I.1.bits of the pointer. together with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to signify a frequency justification. All rights reserved. This event is identified by the A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame. the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B. At Node B. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles • • At Node A.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect Indicators (RDI) and Remote Error Indicators (REI). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B correspond as long as neither direction is disturbed. Out of Frame Second (OFS): An AFS is defined as a second in which one or more out of frame events have occurred. ED 01 SC. Figure 213. 17. while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B. The counting of OFS is sonly supported for the regenerator section termination. and vice versa.or D.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 277/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. Please note that this counter is deprecated by ETSI and will be removed from international standards. while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A. the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A. 4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS As specified in G. after the AU has been resynchronized to the local clock. At the input point the reference value is set to zero by using the TCM feature./24H FE_BBE_.784 and ETSI 300417. G.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters request in G. FEUAS on incoming or egress signal depending of the POM is enable.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 278/399 All rights reserved. . SES and UAS). far end errors cannot be counted in the case of near end failures. FE-SES. Data collection is performed only on 24 hours registers and the NE maintains a buffer of two registers: the 24hours current registers and the historical one. eFE-BBE.In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2 x 24H are stored in the NE for each AU selected. End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the two direction of path and using far-end primitives. The quality within the operator's on domain can be proven regardless of the received quality of the signal at the entry point of the network. For AU PJE counters.1. incFE-ES.1. Refer to G. If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be e nable in the monitoring functions after the matrix.783 The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15 minutes and 24 H counters. Passing on and copying of this document. When the path transports unidirectional payload just the four counters for the NE-PM are activated (BEE. the bidirectional PM collection for Quality of Service has been supported by combining the information on each direction of transport to assess a single unavailability state: the bidirectional path is in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in the unavailable state. No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AU-PJE counters. PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters (BEE.5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of performance monitoring process on Monitoring function. in addition. The bidirectional process need the presence on the two Monitoring functions in the two directions in one NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour collection can be activated with the collection of incFE_BBE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. FE-ES. incFE-SES. ES. 17. In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and both 15minute and 24h collection can be activate 15min. 17. The TCA are also evaluated in both 15-minute and 24H counters. ES. eFE-SES. SES) for NE -PM and FE-PM respectively. This process can be unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process (for QoS). the end-to-end monitoring can be requested provide monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and. for network Maintenance applications.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain.784.826. 17. As the trails are often responsible of the end -to-end customer service. UAS. 17. ED 01 SC.1. the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on one selectable AU within an STM-N signal. eFE-es. .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 279/399 . These counters are called the current register. Suspect Flag A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding register may be either incomplete or invalid. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. which is responsible for PM reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period: . .16. Event Counting The performance events (e.4.OEI to indicate error blocks of the engrossing VC-n. . 900 for 15 min. All rights reserved. After that. A PM report is suppressed and hence no history record is created by the entity. the contents of the current registers are transferred to the first of the recent registers. i. . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. VC-4. SES) are counted in a counter per event.g. and 86400 for 24 h<9. ES and SES counting is stopped during Unavailable Time.TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16-byte string format.Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC-4-nc (n=1. An entity of all near end or far end performance monitoring events is always counted. xx : 30 and xx : 45..Incoming error count (IEC) .g.An interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero) . TCM provides: . The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00: 00 (UTC) and the 15-minute monitoring periods start at xx: oo.TC_REI to indicate error blocks within the TC to the far end. BBE. it is not possible to start individual performance counters (e.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA The feature provides PM data collection at the 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA terminations.1. . SES only). Zero Suppression Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to reduce the amount of PM reports in the system.e. Time stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). zero suppression is active for all PM enabled TPs. The performance monitoring capabilities (applied on p12Mon TP) support both the standard data collection modes: – G. Performance monitoring can be enable and disables at any time during a monitoring period. VC-3 and VC-12 layers. It is also possible to reset an individual current register manually.TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at the near end TC sink. 17.PM was enable enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time equals its nominal value.1. At the end of the monitoring period.PM was running properly (the suspect interval flag is not set) By default. 826 bidirectional for QoS – M2120 unidirectional near–end / far–end for maintenance 17.).9 Performance Data Collection Near end and far end performance-monitoring events are counted over fixed monitoring periods of 15 minutes and 24 hours. The number of suppressed intervals is indicated. together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). the current register is reset. If equipment or line protection switching occurs during a counting interval. PM data is counted on boards that were plugged in at the moment of enabling data collection. the history registers operate as follows: The history data is contained in a stack of registers. Two thresholds mechanism are supported: ED 01 SC. When all recent registers are full. in the form of performance monitoring event counts. All the history registers are time stamped. Different thresholds can be assigned for near end and far end and for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours. the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared to threshold levels. The user can modify and delete such tables. As soon as Performance Monitoring is started on the Craft Terminal.1.. Performance Monitoring can be started at any time. There are sixteen 15-minute period registers and three 24-hour period registers per monitored event. but were plugged out and back in some time during data collection. the PM data of the previous interval is lost in this case. The performance data counted is evaluated every quarter of an hour or every 24 hours and stored there in a history record. When the user disables the monitoring of a TP within the first 10 minutes of a 15-minute period. the oldest information is discarded. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. which has crossed the threshold.10 Data Collection N. Passing on and copying of this document.17. the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level. the contents of the current registers are moved the first of the recent registers.B. Only the period between the last switch and the end of the counting window is counted. Nevertheless. History data. At the end of each monitoring period. The TCA only reports the value of the counter. is stored in registers in the NE. a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager. . The interval is marked for suspect data and the elapsed time indicates the length of the measured period. current PM data is collected on the I/O boards. incrementing the performance counters each time an error is detected. PM data is not counted on boards that were plugged out at the moment of enabling data collection (see PM Configuration dialog). it is possible that have still not been received the PM data of the previous monitoring interval.12 Thresholds For quality supervision purposes. These registers are called the recent registers. The user can retrieve this information from the Current Performance Management Data Dialog. the NE does not provide complete performance measurement for the protected TPs. it does not provide a complete set of all counters.11 Performance Monitoring History Performance monitoring history data is necessary to assess the recent performance of transmission system. Such information can be used to sectionalize faults and to locate the source of intermittent errors.1. Since PM data is not stored after monitoring is disabled. Therefore. 17. 17.1. The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether crossing this value should be no tified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 280/399 All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Increased thresholds (higher than current value of counters) (only for 24 h) 17.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 281/399 . The following limitations apply for explicit clearance: All rights reserved. reset) are defined: a TCA is generated during the monitoring period when the event count reaches or exceeds the set threshold value the first time.For 24-hour (implicit clearance) monitoring periods. .. Select the TP and open the PM Configuration dialog by clicking on the menu item Configure Monitoring.For 15-minute (explicit clearance) monitoring periods. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. two threshold values (set.2 Configuration Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu. the alarm must be manually acknowledged by the user. • • • The value of the low threshold is fixed to "0" (only a single threshold is provided by a threshold table). To clear a TCA. Additionally an explicit clearance of TCAs for all granularity periods is executed if one of the following events occurs during the current interval: • • • Deletion of the current data instance. An SES threshold crossing is cleared at the end of the interval if no unavailability was detected and SES had not reached the low threshold (low threshold equal to 0). This TCA is automatically cleared by the system at the end of the following monitoring period in which the event count is less than or equal to the reset threshold value and there was neither an unavailable nor a suspect period during this monitoring period. Even in case of a suspect interval the TCA is cleared if no unavailability was detected and the low threshold had not been reached. a TCA is generated. one threshold value is defined: if the event count reaches or exceeds the threshold value during the monitoring period. Resetting of counters. The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field. which together form a dataset.PathOverhMon Before Matrix .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 282/399 . The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.PathOverhMon After Matrix . to identify the selected TP. Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) or Supervised Unequipped Termination (SUT. near end 24 hours page FE15. To select a special page label.B. a modified POM/SUT/TC configuration is not automatically recognized and displayed. As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open.TCM After Matrix . click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action. not supported) or Tandem Connection (TCT.B. near end 15 minutes page NE24.TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) . Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end granularity period (15 min. I. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs and VcxCTP.e. far end 24 hours page 24hBi. For AU-4 CTP and TU-x CTP the highest criteria are POM and SUT. Passing on and copying of this document. far end 15 minutes page FE24. click on the top part of the label: • • • • • • All rights reserved. end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM) Each dataset has to be configured independently. . select the POM or SUT option first and then configure the different associated data sets. near and far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end near end) e-e-24h. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. NE15. N. or 24 h). To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs. and page labels. Confirm the configuration with Apply before you continue with a different POM or SUT option.TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix When more than one of the above options is chosen. Every configuration of all monitoring intervals is defined using this dialog. TCM) must be created first.TCM Before Matrix . It is possible to access the same "PM Configuration" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Configure Monitoring option in the Port pull down menu. Therefore make sure to reopen the PM Configuration dialog each time the POM/SUT configuration is changed.TCT Bidirectional After Matrix . N. a Question dialog box is displayed.This "PM Configuration" dialog serves as the main interface to all PM services. the PM Configuration dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options as follow. This may lead to rejections or confirmations of forbidden PM configuration. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 283/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. PM Configuration Dialog (example) 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 214. • Create History Data 01 ED SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 215.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 284/399 . • Mode • Data Collection Select this button to activate performance monitoring. PM question dialog box (example) Activate any item within the page label by selecting the respective radio button. Disabling Data Collection leads to clearance of the current and all history data of this entity. If this item is selected, history data collection is performed in the selected entity for the corresponding TP. Note that on disabling this mode item, no history data is available. Nevertheless, datasets collected prior to deactivation are not cleared and are displayed after reenabling the item, as long as the number of displayed datasets does not exceed 16 for 15 min. granularity. • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Lock Data Collection. Not supported If Lock is selected, PM remains enabled but data collection is stopped. All history performance data remain available. All current values are set to zero. • EML OS Monitoring (only accessible from SH) Not available for Craft Terminal. • Notifications • UAT (only available for 24 h granularity) For 24 h granularity, UAT (Unavailable Time) notifications are created if enabled. This notification results in an UAT alarm in the Alarm Surveillance. N.B. This parameter can only be selected during creation and cannot be subsequently modified. • Suppress Additional Threshold Disabled: the alarm is generated every time the value exceed the upper threshold (value up). Enabled: after a first alarm generation, the alarm is generated again when the value exceeds the upper threshold (value up) after the lower threshold (value down) has been exceeded. • Threshold Table Attach a threshold table to the selected TP. Only assign threshold tables that match the granularity period of the datasets (i.e. a 15 min. threshold table must not be assigned to a 24 h dataset). Otherwise the Transmission view is blocked and only released by closing and reopening the PM Configuration window and the Transmission view. Click on button Attach... to open the PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see) and configure the threshold table (see Chapter on page). Select button Remove to disassociate the threshold table from the entity. N.B. A threshold table can only be attached if Data Collection is enabled. • Set Alarm Severity UAT ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 285/399 • ASAP Id This field shows the label of the ASAP pointer assigned to the UAT alarm • Set ASAP Allows to set new ASAP pointer for the UAT alarm. The Set ASAP button opens the window displayed. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Confirm the configuration with the button Apply before closing the dialog. Otherwise the configuration is lost. 17.3 Display Current Data Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view. Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog by clicking on the menu item Display Current Data. This "Current PM Data" dialog serves to show the results and status of the Performance Monitoring counters. It is possible to access the same "Current PM Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Display Current Data option in the Port pull down menu. The Current PM Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs, the Current PM Data dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options to display as follow: - PathOverhMon After Matrix - PathOverhMon Before Matrix ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 286/399 - TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) - TCM After Matrix - TCM Before Matrix - TCT Bidirectional After Matrix - TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end" granularity period (15min. or 24h) which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label: • • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 15 min , near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h , near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) e-e 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM) All datasets available, which are related to the selected TP and recorded in the current monitoring interval, are displayed in this dialog. The following items are indicated for each entity: • Administrative State Indicates whether the PM collection is locked for the local user or not. • Operational State Indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled. • Suspect Data Indicates if collection errors occurred during the collection period. • • • Threshold Table Indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity. Current Problem List Indicates current UAT ("Unavailable") and TCA ("Threshold Crossed") alarms. N.B. The entry "Unavailable Threshold Crossed" indicates, that both alarms are active. Since the text field is too small to display the full text at a time, use the cursor to scroll the text field in this case. • Elapsed Time Indicates the time, which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started. This information tells the user whether the data collection covers the whole period. At the bottom the PM results are listed. Reset button is used to restart the counting period. Two buttons are present for near-end and far-end periods. Press the Refresh button to update the window contents and display the latest data. Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 287/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 216. Current PM Data Dialog (example) 17.4 Display History Data Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view. Select the TP and open the PM History Data dialog by clicking on the menu item Display History Data. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 288/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This "PM History Data" dialog serves to show stored Performance Monitoring counting. It is possible to access the same "PM History Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Display History Data option in the Port pull down menu. The PM History Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs VCxCTPs, the PM History Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that allows choosing the POM and SUT options to display follow: - PathOverhMon After Matrix - PathOverhMon Before Matrix - TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) - TCM After Matrix - TCM Before Matrix - TCT Bidirectional After Matrix - TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end" granularity period (15min., 24h, 24h bidirectional). To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label. All available datasets (entities), which are related to the selected TP, are displayed in the table: • • • • 15 min , near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h , near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) e-e 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM) The PM data is displayed containing information concerning: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 289/399 • Interval End Time In the format dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss. • • The number of recorded events concerning an entity is divided into near end and far end data Elapsed Time Indicating whether the data collection was complete. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • Susp Indicating suspect data where collection errors occurred during the collection period. In case of 15 min. entities, a maximum of 16 datasets can be displayed simultaneously for each counter; the 24h entities display a maximum of one dataset. The user cannot change these figures. If the limit of 16 datasets for 15 min. granularity and 3 datasets for 24 h granularity is reached, the oldest set in the list is cleared when the next data set arrives. Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this. Figure 217. PM History Data Dialog (example) ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 290/399 17.5 PM Threshold Table Selection The PM Threshold Table Select dialog pops up if the Attach button is clicked in the PM Configuration dialog. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In addition, this dialog can be accessed using the Configuration menu: N.B. Do not open several dialogs at the same time using both possibilities. Since those dialogs are not synchronized, they could display different contents. The dialog presents a list of existing threshold tables. The tables are individually indicated with a number. Each table is dedicated to specific entities, as reported in each table can be modified according the operator selections. The filtering criteria are not operative. The user can perform the following actions: • • Create / Modify / Display a threshold table. Delete an existing threshold table Mark the table in the list and click on the Delete button. Note that a threshold table cannot be deleted if it is attached to a PM entity. An error message informs the user of this situation. • Attach the selected threshold table to a TP entity. It is only available entering from the PM Configuration dialog. The user has to close the dialog explicitly by clicking on the button Close. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 291/399 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 218. PM Threshold Table Select Table 7. Threshold table entities association Layer TP’ s ASSOCIATED Granularity N 1 STM4 RS 15 minutes 2 STM4 RS 24 hours 3 STM1 RS 15 minutes 4 STM1 RS 24 hours 5 STM4 MS NE / FE 15 minutes 6 STM4 MS NE / FE 24 hours 7 STM1 MS NE / FE 15 minutes 8 STM1 MS NE / FE 24 hours 9 VC4 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 10 VC4 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours 11 VC3 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 12 VC3 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours 13 VC12 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 14 VC12 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours After the activation of a PM on a TP, it will be signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 292/399 Figure 219. PM Port View All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 220. PM Transmission View 17.6 PM Threshold Table Creation / Modification / Display 17.6.1 Creation The PM Threshold Table Create dialog pops up when the Create button is clicked in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog. Carry out the following steps to create a threshold table: 1) Enter the table name in input field Name. Leading and succession blanks are ignored. Leaving the input field bla nk or entering only blanks is not allowed and rejected. 2) Select a Granularity of 15 min. or 24 h for the entity. 3) Enter the set (Value Up) and the reset (Value Down) threshold values. Node that the reset value if supported, will be available with 15 min. monitoring periods. Table 1 shows the maximum performance monitoring event values. The respective value is automatically reset to the maximum if a larger figure is entered. 4) Select the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. 5) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. 6) Confirm the entries with Apply to create the threshold table . A number of threshold tables can be created from the same window. Explicitly close the window with button Close. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 293/399 use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Create PM Threshold Table 17. Note that the Name (really "number") cannot be changed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 294/399 .All rights reserved. 3) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. ED 01 SC.6.2 Modification The PM Threshold Table Modify dialog (see) pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see) and the Modify button is clicked. Shows the allowed maximum performance parameter values. Figure 221. Passing on and copying of this document. 2) Modify the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. Carry out the following steps to modify a threshold table: 1) Modify the upper threshold value (Value Up) and the lower value (Value down) Table 1. 4) Confirm the modifications with Apply. ED 01 SC. UAS. PJC low 1.000 172. ES. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.760 PJC high.6.353.159.100 51. 17.639.600 BBE.3 Display The PM Threshold Table Display dialog pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and the Display button is clicked. Passing on and copying of this document.100 207. Refer to the previous chapter for a description of the attribute values and types.753.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 295/399 . Value for 15-min Max.273.000 All rights reserved. FEBBE on all the other 539. 900 86.100 829. FEBBE on STM-1 2. FEES. but select the next threshold table in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and press the Modify button (see). do not close the dialog.600 BBE.600 board OFS.400 SES.800. Maximum Performance Parameter Values Performance Parameter Max. 5) To modify more than one threshold table.800. Explicitly close the dialog with button Close. Value for 24-h period period BBE. Table 8. FEBBE on STM-4 8. FESES 810 78. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.7 PM Overview MSP Overview allows displaying performance overview.All rights reserved. Selecting the PM Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu figures below open.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 296/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Modify PM Threshold Table 17. Figure 222. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 297/399 .All rights reserved. PM Overview Menu item 01 SC. ED Figure 223. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 224. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. PM Overview 3AL 98168 ADAA 298/399 . Figure 225. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Like the figure below. Add TP for PM Overview You can click “ Add TP”button to see the PM data about the selected TP. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 299/399 . PM Overview after add TP 3AL 98168 ADAA 300/399 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 226.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The number of timing reference inputs depends on the configuration of the NE. The simplified figure that follows represents the internal organization of the SETS.048 MHz signal. T2: Reference obtained from incoming 2 Mbits signals. The external sources (outputs) are: ED 01 SC. It can be divided into 2 parts: • • All rights reserved. OSC: the internal oscillator. The derived timing shall be used for all signals and interfaces in the NE that are related to the SDH frame structure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 301/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. The timing can be provided by a source external to the NE or an internal timing generator. T3/T6: Reference obtained from an external incoming 2. whilst the internal oscillator is useful only in the abnormal functioning "Free-running" mode that will be explained later. The SETG is responsible for the generation of the external timing source for the Frame structure and the clock. Follows a brief description of the heart of the NE clock known as the Synchronization Equipment Timing Source (SETS). SETG: the Synchronization Equipment Timing Generator.1 Introduction All SDH NEs require timing in order to generate the necessary synchronization and frame phase reference information. OSC: the internal oscillator. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Internal organization of the SETS. Figure 227. The internal sources (inputs) are: • • • • T1: Reference obtained from incoming STM-N signals.18 Synchronization management 18. according to the SSM algorithm. N. S15: is used to provide notifications and loss of incoming timing reference reporting to the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF). T5: is the 2 Mbit/s reference output for the external equipment synchronization Other reference points: • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Selector A provides the capability to select timing reference from available T1 inputs. dependant of the quality of the reference clock generating the timing. T2 and T3). The automatic selection is based either on the priority of the incoming timing source (Priority algorithm) or on the priority and the quality level of the incoming sources (SSM algorithm). T2. It is static information. The SETG during normal functioning stores regularly the value of the external timing reference.• • • T0: is the reference output signal for the clock and signal frames. to switch between SETG output signal (T0) and a T1 timing reference. or SSM threshold violation. The SETG has 3 modes of operation: • Locked mode: The SETG output is fully controlled by the external timing references (T1. the quality of the timing source is located in the Section Overhead. On the other hand. Selector B is capable of selecting timing reference from T1. either automatically based on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources (SSM algorithm). the quality of the source is dynamic information. ED 01 SC. T4: is the reference output for the external equipment synchronization.B. • Manually: Following an order from the Operator. or manual as a result of commands issued from the managing system. The capability for manual selection of the timing source is also provided. In an SDH signal frame. The choice of the timing reference is done in two ways: • Automatically: Following a particular algorithm based on the quality and the priority of the incoming timing signals.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 302/399 . The squelch functions A and B mute the relevant timing references in the presence of failure condition. Selector C is only operated in manual mode. or T3 inputs. • Hold-Over mode: The external timing reference is malfunctioning. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Y: is used for communication of Synchronization Status Message (SSM) between SETS and MST functional blocks. In this case the SETG output is controlled by this memorized value. The Operator for each candidate-timing source determines the priority level. T0 Configuration.2 Synchronization Management The operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Timing Source Configuration. Protection Commands. The external timing reference and the memorized timing reference are malfunctioning.• Free running mode: This is not a normal operating mode.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 303/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Obtaining the synchronization view Selecting this menu option the synchronization representation will be displayed directly into the current window instead of the current view. All the operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are performed from this synchronization view. 18. Using menu options. Remove Timing Reference. Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration.2. select the Synchronization option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure. T0 TEST Configuration (not operative in current release) SSU Configuration. Frame Mode Configuration Show Timing Source.1 Displaying the Synchronization View The synchronization view can be normally opened using the menu Views options. Figure 228. ED 01 SC. Before any other operation the synchronization view has to be displayed. 18. T4 Configuration. All rights reserved. Change T4<-> T5 Set T0 Equal T4 Change 2 MHz -> 2 Mbit (available only if T3 has been configured as timing source) Remove T0 Equal T4. Passing on and copying of this document. In this case the SETG output is controlled by the internal clock source. Figure 229. the presence of the T4 list is configurable using resource files.2. 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 304/399 ED . Activating the SSM algorithm implies that the selection of the source is before done on the quality criteria and then on the priority criteria for sources at the same quality level. Synchronization View Example Synchronization View Description The synchronization view provides two lists of allowable timing references: • • One for T0 timing output. After selecting the Synchronization option from the Views menu the Synchronization View is visualized. T4 or T5.2 Synchronization View The Synchronization view shows the external timing reference sources and the T0. T0 list is always present. One for T4 timing output. The selection is based on the SSM algorithm or on the priority of the incoming timing sources. All rights reserved.18. generation. no request. the small box will be lighted up when all the selected timing source are lost.The name of the timing source: Internal Oscillator . manual switch. . displayed when the clock operates in Free Running mode . T4 list contains: . displayed when the clock operates in Holdover mode. The T0 and T4 lists are used for the management of reference timing source protection. .The status of the synchronization source: (lockout. failure) . T0 list contains: . the basic component contained in the synchronization view are described: • Timing reference Each allowable timing reference.The priority of the timing input source . the timing reference graphical object displays (with the exception of Internal Oscillator timing reference) the following information (if the timing source has been declared by the user): . a 1:n protection like mechanism is used for the selection of the timing source from T0 (T4) list of the allowable timing references.Empty string is displayed when the clock operates in Lock .The name of the selected timing source .A label "0" representing the priority of the Internal Oscillator • Selectors ED 01 SC. .A timing reference associated to the Internal Oscillator timing source. is represented by the graphical object displayed in the view. The protection system chooses the timing reference to generate the output T0 (T4) either automatically.All rights reserved. DRIFT means that the Frequency Offset between the external signal source and the internal clock is high then the maximum tolerance value.A label field representing the abnormal clock operation modes. Passing on and copying of this document.6 max timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Holdover. In the timing reference graphical object associated to the Internal Oscillator the following information are displayed: . force switch. automatic switch. View elements description Here after. one of the following strings can be displayed in the label field: . basing on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources according a selection algorithm or manually under control of the managing system.2 small boxes representing the SSF (Los) and DRIFT alarms detected on the timing source.Free running. SSF means that the Server Signal Failure is sending a wrong reference signal to the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 305/399 . .6 timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1 configurable by the operator. In case of alarm indication the operator can select Show Timing Source to visualize the alarm detail.The label of the quality level of the timing input source .A small box representing the LOS alarm. indicating the Holdover or Free Running operation mode. it is always present and it cannot be removed or redefined. T2 or T3/T6 configurable by the operator. . The selector C. . . In the same way.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 306/399 . a solid line between T0 signal and T4/T5 signal (or T0_Test signal) box is drawn when T0 signal is used to generate T4/T5 18.He output signal T4/T5. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Synchronization Menu The menu options are grey according to the current state of the dialogue box that the user can open.Small ellipse are used to represent respectively: . Passing on and copying of this document. • Squelch Status Boxes contained a label field are used to represent the squelch statuses T0/T4 and T4. The box displays the configured quality level threshold and it is lighted up when the output-timing signal is inhibited.The selector A. ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. • Line Type The following different line type are used to link the output signals and the respective allowable timing reference: .The output signal T0.A dashed line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is not currently in use as timing source but will act in the protecting role. Figure 230. .A solid line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is currently used to generate that signal. • Output Signal An arrow and a label field are used to represent respectively: .2.3 Timing Source Configuration This functionality allows configuring the input synchronization sources and configuring or modifying the timing source priority and quality. .The selector B. port) enter the physical board termination point (TP) value. as shown in the above figure. Sources both for T0 clock and for T4 clock. Figure below shows an example of the opened windows. these TP are: EIS for electrical SDH port. Following the TP Search procedure described in Para. Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments The Timing source configuration dialogue box which opens.Firstly select a synchronization source reference and after the Synchronization menu to open the Synchronization Option List. Figure 231. subrack. Passing on and copying of this document. It permits to configure the following timing source information: • • Quality level. The following dialogue box is opened. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. OpS for optical SDH port. On page (rack. All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Then select the Timing Source Configuration option from the cascading menu. Source reference and click on Timing Source Configuration and then on the Input Source Choice. Priority level Extracted Quality is the actual Rx quality retrieved from the signal received from the line. Select an empty synch.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 307/399 . displays the extracted quality of the selected timing source. This operation can be repeated for the entire available empty synch. board. ED 01 SC. in increasing order. Levels 6.813.811. Q. Priority of 1 is the highest priority.. G. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. five quality levels: G.811). Timing source may have. Figure 232.All rights reserved. If Input Quality Configuration is set to a value other than "Extracted"..3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 308/399 .812T.2 are intermediate levels between level 0 and 1. Rx quality is forced to this value. Source configuration for ADM equipment Click on the Input Quality Configuration: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired quality level. Synch. Don't use (where the highest quality level is G. Passing on and copying of this document. 0 6 5 4 3 2 1). The internal oscillator-timing source will have the lowest priority (priority=0) and its priority cannot be changed. in increasing order of priority (i.e. G. The other timing sources will have a priority of 1 to n. Click on the Priority: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired priority level. G.812L.. the corresponding physical interface denomination (rack-subrack-board-port) is written on the window bottom left. . This selection is independent of the priority or quality of the timing source.4 Synchronization Protection Commands Select the timing reference from the synchronization view. If the timing source is lockout or unavailable. Releasing terminates the forced switch mode or inhibiting the force selected timing source. Otherwise the automatic selection algorithm overrules the manual selection. According to the current state of the selected timing source. From the dialogue box that opens. Lockout. If the previously manual selected timing source becomes unavailable the automatic selection is activated. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization... You can then select the Protection Commands to open the view. The "Status" indication describes the current synch. All rights reserved. b) Invoke/Release Force and Manual Selection of Timing Source General selection A timing source can be selected manually or automatically. Menu options are grey.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 309/399 . this operation is impossible. Positioning the mouse on the synch. Force and Manual commands a) Invoke/Release Lockout: Locking or unlocking a timing source enables or disables the timing source from being considered as a possible timing source for T0 or T4.B. Automatic Switch. Source box "Port#" test. status (No Request. The internal oscillator cannot be forced or manually selected.2. ED 01 SC. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. A timing source is considered to be available if it is not lockout and has not a failure condition or Priority level of 0. Figure 233. Furthermore.) N. the selection of a particular incoming timing source (except the internal oscillator) may be forced. Select the Synchronization pull down menu. Failure.When the configuration of the timing source is completed. The manual selection option is only possible if the quality and priority of the selected timing source are sufficient. you can confirm or cancel the operation. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. 18. Passing on and copying of this document. on the same quality level basis the reference clock Source with the best priority will be selected. Selecting the T0 or T4 Configuration set the SSM algorithm and the Wait To Restore Time in the dialog box upper part. the following operations have to be done: • • • • Select the T0 or T4 source. Squelch may be forced by the Operator or according to squelch criteria. In Revertive mode the internal selector A/B changes every time to the best reference clock with the highest quality. with fixed WTR. click on the OK button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. Click on the Synchroniza tion menu. In this NE revertive mode is hardware set. This command permits to select/deselect the SSM algorithm. command. The changing mechanism of the reference inputs is controlled by the wait time to restore: this time sets a delay before to change the input source.. Forced or manual Selection option. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. forced or manual selection.2. Click on the SSM Algorithm to select/deselect it.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria Select the available T0 or T4 synchronization sources and then the T0 or T4 Configuration. Click on Apply in the displayed confirmation box. The squelch function mutes the relevant timing references in the presence of a failure condition. The T0/T4 and T1/T4 squelch fields enables you to configure the quality level of the T0 or T4 timing source. The T5 output field allows selecting the bit used (from #4 to #8) for SSM. This functionality allows configuring the external timing reference (T4) squelch criteria. Manual selection is not operative in the current release All rights reserved. When T1 is selected to generate T4 (squelch A ) :T1 may be squelched if T1 Quality Level is lower than the programmable threshold or if it becomes unavailable. Click on the T0: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level.. Different squelch criteria may be applied: • • When T0 is selected to generate T4 (squelch B ): T0 may be squelched if all the allowable timing references of Selector B have Quality Level lower than the programmable threshold. ED 01 SC. to set the wait time to restore and to enable the revertive procedure if all these features are available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. which consists in a choice of quality level. Wait To Restore Time button and Revertive option button are disabled Selecting T4 Configuration it is possible to set the T4 squelch criteria in the bottom dialog box.To perform or release a T0 or T4 lockout. When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed. The T4 squelch configuration dialogue box enables you to configure the quality level of the T4 timing source. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the Protection Commands option then invoke/Release the Lockout. opening the relevant option menu. 18.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 310/399 . 6 SSU Configuration The SSU configuration command allows either to configure the single NE or the NE with SSU.2. All rights reserved. Figure 234. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria 18. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the last case the SSU quality has to be defined. Selecting SSU Configuration from the Synchronization menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 311/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. ED 01 SC.Click on the T4: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. The T4 Force Squelch enables you to activate the T4 forced squelch. When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 312/399 . Figure 236. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2. SSU Configuration 18.7 Remove Timing Reference Select the synch. To remove the selected source click on " OK " button of the confirmation message. Source to remove and click on the Remove Timing Reference option.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Synchronization source removing To remove the selected source click on " OK " button of the confirmation message. Figure 235. 2. Synchronization source removing confirmation All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 18.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 313/399 .8 Change T4 <-> T5 This Menu allows the change of the synchronization physical interface from 2Mhz (T4) to 2 Mbit/s (T5) and vice versa This menu is enabling only if the SERGI board is present in the subrack Select Change T4 <-> T5 from the Synchronization. Figure 238. Change T4 <-> T5 menu A confirmation message appears ED 01 SC.Figure 237. Change T4 <-> T5: command execution 18.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 314/399 .Figure 239.9 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit This menu is enabled only if the operator selects a protection unit. the new window display T5 inserted of T4 All rights reserved. which has as source a 2 MHz or a 2 Mbit/s without traffic ED 01 SC. Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message Click on ok to confirm. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 240.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then the label will be changed into 2MHz ED 01 SC. Figure 241. Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message Click on ok to confirm The label of the protection unit will be changed depending on the kind of source selected: • • If the selected protection unit is a 2 MHz.Select Change 2MHz -> 2Mbit from the Synchronization All rights reserved. If the selected protection unit is a 2 Mbit/s. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 315/399 . Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu A confirmation message appears Figure 242. then the label will be changed into 2Mbit/s. All rights reserved. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution 18. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Source and click on Set T0 Equal T4 menu option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 316/399 . ED 01 SC. The connection between T0/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line as in the example of Figure below.10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 To connect T0 internal synch.2. Select a synch. Figure 243. with the Inserted option. It is also possible to transmit different quality level selecting a different value. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This selection allows.11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration Select the T1 SDH Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the Transmission SSM Quality Configuration is enabled. The T0/T4 connection will become shaped while the connection between T1/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line.All rights reserved. to transmit the system internal T0 clock quality towards the external SDH interface. ED 01 SC. Figure 244. Click on Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration of the Synchronization menu option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 317/399 . 18.2. Passing on and copying of this document. T4 equal T0 setting To separate T4 from T0 click on the " Remove T0 Equal T4" menu option. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Click on Show Timing Source of the Synchronization menu option. Transmission SSM Quality This Transmission SSM Quality window can be also opened from any SDH boards. then access the Board view> Port view> Physical Media > SDH Tx Quality Configuration.12 Show Timing Source Selecting any T1 or T2 Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the Show Timing Source is enabled. it is also possible to open the window selecting the Transmission option of the View menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 318/399 . In both cases select the MST block 18. This selection allows analyzing the input source considering its payload structure and the related alarms (Port view is presented) . ED 01 SC. Figure 245. then access the Physical Media > SDH Tx Quality Configuration option. Passing on and copying of this document.2. Select the Equipment option of the View menu. Timing Source Example 01 SC. ED Figure 246.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 319/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. 3 Operative sequence to configure MS-SPRING In the following paragraphs 2-Fiber and NPE operative sequence to follow during configuration are inserted. AU4 permutation (change of AU4 allocation) is not allowed. the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4 and as Destination Node. 19. All rights reserved. i. the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.19 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT 19. Ring map and the related Squelching Table for each node of the ring.1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING Next paragraphs lit the operative sequence according the type of produce to obtain. 19. to follow before to implement the MS-SPRing protection: there are some limitations concerning the aggregate types or the AU4s cross-connections to be considered. ED 01 SC.2.1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices The following suggestions must be considered in the MS-SPRING connection configuration: • • • • • SNCP.2 MS-SPRING connection configuration advices In the following paragraphs 2-Fiber and NPE advices are reported.3. Passing on and copying of this document. Only AU4s from #1 to 8# must be used and configured for path installation. . AU4 cross connection Aggregate side. as Source Node. The description of the MS-SPRING protections is inserted in the Technical Handbook. paths received from the Aggregate line and looped-back to the (same) Aggregate line are not allowed. Follow the "Squelching Table Configuration" in order to define the "Squelchi ng Table HO" for East and for West aggregates describing. The AU4 allocated to pass-through in HVC connections must be the same through the node. 4 Fiber MS-SPRING and Aggregate MSP protection connections cannot be installed in a 2 Fiber MS-SPRING network. AU4s from #9 to #16 don't have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter of "Squelching table" provisioning. 19.e.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 320/399 . in the desired order. WTR Ring must be same in all the nodes.1 MS-SPRING introduction Different MS-SPRING protections architectures are provided: 2-Fiber (Terrestrial). for each connection installed. This leads to an unprotected connections installation.841. 4 Fiber MS-SPRING is not operative in this release. G. Create an MS-SPRING schema with WTR.Activation procedure a. See ITU-T Rec. and 4Fiber NPE (Transoceanic). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Node Identifier. 19. at the end of the provisioning update. In the Manage ring Map view insert the node in the selected position. Next nodes are automatically shifted. "Default K byte West or East" detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MS-SPRing label -> "Protocol exception"). in this step. Squelching table. will occur on those Aggregate of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. ED 01 SC. "Default K byte West or East" detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MS-SPRing label -> " Protocol exception"). c. In the Manage ring Map view select the node and click on the "Remove Node" button b. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRing management select "DEACTIVATE" in each node of the ring. b. in the desired order. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. WTR. Verify in the View Protection Status Parameter screen. e. Physical add the node and configure with 2 -Fiber MS-SPRING activated with the right configuration (Ring Map. Connect the fibers and send the "Release" command of the relevant "Force Ring" to both NE's adjacent to the removed node. will occur on those Aggregate of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. in this step. send "Force Ring" command to both NE's adjacent to the node to be added. Physical remove the node e. d. c. Opening the View Protection Status screen.b. node Identifier). All rights reserved. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. Connect the fibers and send the "Release" command of the relevant "Force Ring" to both NE's adjacent to the added node. - Adding a node a. 19. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen. d. The available tables permit to visualize for the same NE the architecture 2 x 2-Fiber. The Transoceanic application with 4 -Fiber is not supported in current release. c.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 321/399 . For the 2-Fiber Terrestrial application a max. - Removing a node a.4 MS-SPRING Management In the NE current release the NE supports the MS-SPRING protection as "Terrestrial architecture". send "Force Ring" command to both NE's adjacent to the node to be removed. b. of 16 nodes are available. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRing management select "ACTIVATE" in each node of the ring. Deactivation procedure a. Consider that. Passing on and copying of this document. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRIng management select "DELETE" in each node of the ring. that all the nodes of the ring are in "MS-SPRing activate" and "No request" state. Consider that. 1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration Select the MS-SPRing pull down menu.Figure below shows the MS–SPRing pull down menu. When the user clicks on these buttons the dialog box will close without starting any operation. Then select the Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management option from the pull down menu. 19. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4. Figure below opens ED 01 SC. Figure 248. Figure 247. Passing on and copying of this document. Display MS–SPRing pull down menu The first Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management option contains all the commands to configure and manage the MS-SPRing. MS-SPRing Management dialog box The only command available is Create. Click on Create to start the MS-SPRing configuration. The name of Schema Selection in not editable but is fixed to "No Schema".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 322/399 . In any dialog box is present the Cancel or Close buttons. The following dialogue box is displayed when no protection have been previously configured All rights reserved. The Holdoff Time command is not operative in current release. The label r(xx)sr(y)sl(zz)port#(hh) where r=rack. The OK button will start the selected operation. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the working and protection ports on each side are different. Figure below opens and all commands are now available. sl=slot give the position of the physical port.(not supported in current relese) The "Port Selection" depends on the Architecture type: if the architecture is a 2F MSSPRing. Then the dialog window will be closed. If the architecture is a 4F MS-SPRing. Figure 249. the working and protection port on each side is the same and the "Protecting West and East" fields are disabled (greyed). The cursor is displayed busy up to receiving a reply. In the same board it is generally possible to have different port numbers. sr=subrack. Passing on and copying of this document. Creation Schema dialog box The user can select the MS_SPRing Application and the Architecture types supported by the Network Element. Only one port number (port#01) is available in the 1664SM Actually for 1664SM the working and protection aggregate boards have a fixed location in the subrack and the "Choose Port" buttons is not used.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 323/399 . Transoceanic MS-SPRing is a 4 Fiber architecture. Terrestrial MS-SPRing Application is a 2 Fiber architecture. Node Id and associated ring node position The Ring Map sets the connection sequence of the nodes within the ring. The matrix represents up to 64 nodes for transoceanic application and up to 16 nodes for terrestrial application. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 324/399 . Figure below opens Figure 251. Activated MS-SPRing Management Click on Ring Map to configure the network node connection. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 250. Ring Position=4) is depicted in Figure below. Click on the WTR Time button. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 325/399 . displaying the busy cursor up to receiving the replay to the actions. Ring map configuration Repeat the procedure for all nodes of the ring selecting the different NEs and edit the different Current Nodeld value. The following Ring Position of the nodes on the right decreases by one and the erased Nodeld is inserted into Available Nodeld . select the node and click on Remove Node button. Clicking on the Add Node button the selected "Ring position" will shift one step on the righ starting from "1" position and in the "Nodeld" field the Available Nodeld values is inserted.All rights reserved. 0 to 15 for terrestrial application) releasing the left mouse button or pushing the stepper arrows and enter keys to select the Nodeld value. In the same time the Available Nodeld will be updated to a new value. The default association for a four node node ring related to the fourth node (Nodeld=3. Select Current Nodeld (it means the NE where the operator is acting) in the box and enable Change Nodeld button (Id means Node Identifier) Select Available Nodeld in the pull down list (0 to 63 for transoceanic application. Figure below opens ED 01 SC. The OK button will start the selected operation. This will be displayed in the Available Nodeld box then click on Add Node button. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. so it can be assigned to other nodes. Figure 252. Then the dialog window will be closed. To remove a node. 19. The range value accepted is from 60 sec.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 326/399 . ED 01 SC.4. Passing on and copying of this document. Click on OK to apply the WTR Configuration. The step value is 60 sec. Figure below opens. Figure below shows the error message visualized when is selected the Ring Traffic with a Terrestrial application. it is disable (grey) for 2 fiber architecture. WTR Time Span is used only for 4 -fiber architecture. Figure 254. Example of error message Click on Squelching Table to configure the AU4 (Au4#1 to AU4#8 for 2F Architecture) connection between the different nodes. Figure 253.2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications With a 2 fiber Terrestrial application can be selected the Squelching Table while with a 4 fiber Transoceanic application can be selected the Ring Traffic If the operator tries to select a different table a error message is visualized. The same opens clicking on Configure Squelch Table of the MS-SPRing pull down menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The same WTR Time Ring must be set on each Node of the ring. to 900 sec. WTR dialog box Click on the push mouse button on the p/down Seconds arrows to select the required delay for the relevant WTR.All rights reserved. All rights reserved. 19. Figure 255.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 327/399 . Example of a ring traffic The squelching table is applicable only for OH-VC signals. Squelching table When the window is opened for the first time the squelching table is N/A (not available) because the NE has never been configured.4. ED 01 SC.1 Squelching table example Figure 256.2. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the node identification number (0 to 15) from the available list using the slider or the stepper arrows on the right scroll region. Point the mouse on the matrix position and click on the right mouse button to open the node list menu. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 328/399 . Connections of the ring Figure 258. West side 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Squelching table of Node A. ED Figure 257. Squelching table of Node A. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Squelching table of Node B. East side Figure 260.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 329/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. West side ED 01 SC. Figure 259. Squelching table of Node B. Squelching table of Node C. West side ED 01 SC. East side Figure 262. Figure 261.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 330/399 . Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 331/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 263. Squelching table of Node D. Squelching table of Node C. West side ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. East side Figure 264. the protocol request and the protocol protection errors are described in next chapters describing the "MS-SPRing Protection Status and Commands". Passing on and copying of this document. The statuses. Figure 266. Active. The delete action is started after confirming the window message. 19.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 332/399 . Confirmation message During the activation procedure on different ADMs some of these can be Activate status. the status becomes Enable. This command starts the request to deactivate the MS-SPRing protection mechanism When the selected protection schema is Enable the Delete button starts the request to remove it. Deactivate and Delete commands The Main Activates commands manage the MS-SPRing configuration. The MS-SPRing status can be Enable. To change from Active to Enable click on the Deactivate button. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5 MS-SPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application ED 01 SC.4. Squelching table of Node D. After having configured the protection schema by means of the Create button. Figure 265. East side 19. others in Inactivate status.3 Activate. Disable and Inactive. The Activate button selection set "in service" the MS-SPRing protection mechanism on the selected schema configuration. Passing on and copying of this document. Commands button in the MS-SPRing -> Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management Figure below is opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 333/399 . In the MSPRing 2 Fiber configuration.5. the 1-8 working channels are inserted into the 9-16 protection channels in the opposite side of the failure event as shown in figure below. Clicking on the Prot. Figure 267.19. Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F) The working/protection span state boxes are not available (grey) for the 2Fibwer MSSPRing architecture. All rights reserved.1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands If a protection schema is Active it is possible to select one of the above commands. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. WTR. Ring Protection (2F) 19. four operative. Force.All rights reserved. Manual. Manual. Figure 269. it doesn't assume the Span meaning of the four-fiber protection. Lockout commands (2F) ED 01 SC. Exercise (not operative in current release). Term "Span" identifies the section interested by the command.5. The lockout section present six lockout commands. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 334/399 . Each lockout command is applicable on different points where the lockout actions has to be performed and any "Lockout" command is associated to a "Release" command to come back to the previous status.2 External commands (2F) The external protection commands are: Lockout. Figure 268. The lockout commands disable the MS-SPRing management. When are present multiple ring failures the automatic B/S protection will try to maintain on all the possible connections. Some network protection mechanisms are accepted or rejected depending on the type (tail/head) (lockout command. (Protection not disable ). With the lockout protection span command and a ring failure. The K1/K2 communication protocol MS-SPRing is generated from the two nodes adjacent to "Event" via the protection communication channels. Tail-end / Head-end association If the node is tail end. The "Events" will be signaled if the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened. On the contrary. Figure 271. the ring protection is disable if this ring failure has occurred in another ring section.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 335/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. A node is defined tail-end when it firstly receives the "Event". Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) The protection events can be equipment/signal failure. the ring protection is served if this ring failure occurred the same section. with the lockout working ring command failure and a ring failure along a different section. The "Events" will be served if some actions (B/S=bridges and switches) are executed and the network has been updated. while if the node is head-end.) All rights reserved. the ring protection is served (protection non disable ) ED 01 SC. it serves the request node protection.Figure 270. A single ring failure is completely restored but not two ring failures. signal degrade or external command or a combination of them. without execute actions. Figure below shows the association of tail end / tail end or head-end / tail end. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the second node is defined head-end when it receives back the protocol answer. the lockout working ring/span commands disable the protection MS-SPRing mechanisms. ED Figure 272. Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 336/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Figure 273. This command disables the acknowledgment of the signal failure/degrade on the aggregate ports. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 337/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F) Figure below shows a ring with three nodes and the actions performed by the lockout commands. The Force Span command is not operative in " fiber MS-SPring. Forced and Manual Commands (2F) ED 01 SC. Lockout command and non-served failures (2F) The Force command executes a forced protection.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 338/399 . Figure 275.All rights reserved. The Force Ring command substitutes the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) with the opposite direction protection channels (AU4 9 to 16) between two adjacent nodes. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 274. When a force ring command is applied a next working failure is not able to modify the forced configuration applied. Figure below visualizes the ring protection with a Force/Manual command and a signal failure. Vice versa the "Manual" protection is exceeded by the "Automatic" protection. In this condition the ring can be split according the location of command and event.lockout protection span. Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) The Manual command is similar to Force command but it is at a lower priority level with respect to automatic MS-SPRing. SF-R is for "Signal Failure Request". Figure 276. That is because force ring command has a higher priority respect to the "Automatic" working protection.lockout working ring . FS-R is for "Force Switching Request". ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The general priority scale that can be applied to solve antithetical situations starting from the lowest priority level is: manual ring .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 339/399 .automatic working ring force ring . 3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 277. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) 3AL 98168 ADAA 340/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. set in the configuration menu. Example of confirmation dialog box Clicking on the WTR command next figure opens. The waiting time. A confirmation dialog box opens and. Figure 280. can be cleared selecting the Clear WTR Ring command. Figure 279. in the Local Condition field of Figure (Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F)). becomes red a waiting time has been activated after repairing the ring failure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 341/399 . Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) Each command starts when the proper button is selected.5. Clear WTR command (2F) 19. From each command exists its own Release button to cancel the previously selected command and come back to normal MS-SPRing protection. if the operator clicks OK. Figure 278. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. A dialog box has to be confirmed before the command is performed. If the WTR box.All rights reserved.3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands In general dual contemporary "Events" can be: Two external commands An external command and a ring/span failure ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. the WTR box turns off and the protection status window is updated. Figure below depicts a clockwise ring network. In the SS or OS the "Events" can appear on the same node (SN) or on the different nodes (DN). Ring network reference scheme (2F) Figure up visualizes the ring reference scheme: the adjacent node (A N) is the node connected to the reference point. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Two contemporary ring/span failures Dual "Events" can appear on the same side W/W (West/West) or E/E (East/East)(SS= same side) or on the opposite side W/E or E/W (OS= opposite site) of the ring network. The network propagation K1-K2 protocol signals are according to the follo wing legend: C All rights reserved. the different node can be an adjacent node (AN) or a remote node (RN).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 342/399 . Force switch) is neither served nor signaled that is erased (it is not pending at the node) Figure 281. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. = served the column element = served the row element = served both row and column elements = signaled (no served) the column element = signaled (not served) the row element = signaled (not served) both row and column R B Cs Rs Bs elements When a command (Manual switch. Figure 282. Passing on and copying of this document.The automatic protection for dual ring failure is below. Examples of Double ring failure ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 343/399 . In this figure are depicted the node switches for any reported double events. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Consider the network reference scheme with a tail end / head-end alarm propagation. All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. both commands are served (B). Lockout working SS. In the other cases. the ring protection will be only signaled (pending) ED 01 SC. In this last case has to be considered the priority level. Automatic protection has priority with respect to the Manual command. For each of them the associated "Events" is listed on the first column at the left of the table. Two manual ring commands can be only signa led: Bs (Manual SS-SN and OS-AN commands give the same ring protection switching and then both can be served). Two Lockout commands are both always served: B Force command has priority with respect to the Manual one. the lockout protection prevents the working 1-8 channels from being inserted into protecting 916 ones. The first row at the top of the protection table shows the "Events" at the reference pint. Lockout protection SS. Figure 283. Force Ring and Automatic Protection (or two Force ring commands) are always served if they are not applied on the SS-SN. because it has a higher priority. Lockout protection SS-RN/OS-RN and manual or automatic or force command. The lockout protection is served.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 344/399 . The behavior is that seen for two automatic protection switching. Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization Schemas are applied to describe dual generic "Events" where both ring failures and external commands are considered.SN has priority with respect to Manual or Automatic protection and Force commands. Lockout protection SS-AN/OS-SN overrides the Manual or Automatic or Force command because the lockout protection controls the switching channels of the same Node.AN channels are not managed by the lockout protection: B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.SN/OS-AN and Manual or Automatic or Force command are both served because the switching SS.SN/OS. 4 .Grey: not available state box. The state boxes don't describe the protection actions provided on the NEs. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 284.Green: Active State.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 345/399 .3 .Lockout Switching . .Forced Switching .Idle (regular operation without MS-SPRing protection) These protection states are represented with the following color state boxes: . the MS-SPRing configuration comes back to its status.1 .2 .Red: Inactive State and any external or protection executed command (that has been served). The served "Events" (B/S=bridges and switches are executed and the network has been updated) are completed B/S actions visualized as red box indications.All rights reserved. Automatic switching and external commands are revertive: then when the "Events" have been cleared. .5. Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F) 19.Yellow: ordered but not executed command (that has only been signaled = pending status) . ED 01 SC.4 2F Protection Status Visualization The protection statuses ring networks are: . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Manual Switching . No Request condition . The state boxes visualize the "Node Condition Request" as a consequence of the equipment/signal failure or the external commands detected on the corresponding side ("Event").5 . The signaled "Events" (the k1/k2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened) are pending B/S visualized as yellow box indications.Automatic Switching (MS -SPRing protection for equipment/signal failure). Figure below shows the protection status with a served East manual ring command. the third the "Events" result on the nodes and the fourth one checks the k1/k2 ring protocol.All rights reserved. The red color means that the command has been served. while the 3 and 4 nodes are "Intermediate Node". The first one describes the network configuration and application type and its status. Local Conditions. In the middle "WTR-Ring" refers to West and East sides. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. a protocol alarm is signaled with red boxes. A regular protocol "Exceptions" is represented with white boxes. Any protection status window is divided in different status fields: Schema description and status. Node Conditions and Protocol Exceptions. "No Request" corresponding to "Idle Status". the second gives the local external commands indications. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. On the West there are all the box indications corresponding to the West protections and commands. Unavailable" indications are activated when a lockout protection command is applied in a network node. Middle and East. and "Intermediate Node" denotes that the protections and commands don't concern the node involved. The "Prot. The Manual Ring command visualizes "Manual Ring" on the local node and "Request Node Ring" in the both "Local Conditions adjacent East ADM1-West ADM2 nodes. The window is divided into three parts: West.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 346/399 . ED 01 SC. Figure 285. Figure below shows the lockout statuses and Figure below the automatic protection statuses. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. C). Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network Figure below reports the "Protection Status" for external "Force and Manual" commands in a 3 -node ring (A.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 347/399 .All rights reserved. B. All rights reserved. ED Figure 286. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 348/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 287. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 349/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) 01 SC.All rights reserved. Figure 288.1 Double ring failure The double ring failure visualization of Figures (Example of Double ring failure) are here following reported.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 350/399 . Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) The WTR status is visualized on the side where the link has been repaired.4. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5. The considered network failures are related to a tail-end/head-end node connection. 19. The "WTR Clear" command can be executed by the user without waiting the WTR setting time. All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. The node 2 isolated. the nodes 2 -3 in switching and the node 4 intermediate. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 351/399 . Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-AN). The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" West ADM3-East ADM1: red (served) "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM2: yellow (pending) ED 01 SC. Figure 289. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The nodes 1."Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved.2. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 352/399 . Figure 290. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN).4 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both the two signal failures are served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: ED 01 SC. Figure 291. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 353/399 . The nodes 1.2 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both signal failures are served: B."Request Node Ring" East ADM3-Eas ADM1: red (switching for SF) "Request Node Ring" East ADM4-East ADM2: red (switching of the opposite nodes) All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM1: red (switching for SF) "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red All rights reserved. Figure 292. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle" ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 354/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "WTR Ring” : red (to signal the SF recovering) "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM1: red "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The "WTR (Wait To Restore) Ring" on ADM1 node becomes red to signal that the SF disappears at the "reference point".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 355/399 .Figure up reports the previous protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOS-AN) while the ring protection comes back to its "idle" status. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 356/399 . Figure 293.19.2.3 nodes becomes pending while the 4 node is "Intermediate node". Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Both the commands can be only pending.4. The "Request ring" to 1.5. ED 01 SC. The box color is white unless otherwise specified.2 Double external command or an external command and a ring failure All rights reserved. Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN) Figure up report the protection status with double manual command (reference point-SSAN). "Active": green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: yellow (pending) for Manual Ring East ADM1 "Request Node Ring" East ADM2-West ADM3: yellow (pending) for Manual Ring East ADM2 "Request Node Ring" West ADM1-East ADM3: yellow (pending) for switching of the opposite nodes "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 357/399 . Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double manual command (reference point-OSAN). Both the commands can be served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: red (served) ED 01 SC. Figure 294.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 358/399 . Both the manual commands are served.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. The "Request Manual ring" to ADM1 (East) and to ADM2 opposite side (West) collapses in the same manual command. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Both the commands are served because the bridge/switch points are different."Intermediate Node" ADM3. Both the manual and the lockout commands are visualized to the same ADM1 node (East). Figure 295. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: ED 01 SC. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN) Figure up reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference point-SS-SN).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 359/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ADM4: red All rights reserved. The "Prot. Unavailable" is not propagated on West ADM2 node because on West ADM2 the protection switching has been executed. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.B. All rights reserved. ADM4: red "Manual Ring and Lockout Prot.West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3. Unavailable" East ADM1: red.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 360/399 ."Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 ." commands East ADM1: red "Prot. N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN) Figure up reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference point-SS-RN). Passing on and copying of this document. The manual command is pending while the lockout command is served.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 361/399 .East ADM2: yellow (pending) for switching of the opposite nodes "Lockout Prot. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Manual Ring" commands East ADM1: yellow Request Node Ring" East ADM1 . Unavailable" East ADM3 and West ADM4: red (served) ED 01 SC. Figure 296.West ADM2: yellow (pending) "Request Node Ring" West ADM1 ." command: East ADM3: red "Prot. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 362/399 . Figure 297.All rights reserved. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN). The automatic protection has a higher priority with respect to the manual command and then it has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: red (served) ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green ED 01 SC. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a force ring command (reference point-SS-AN) The ADM2 is isolated and the force command is pending. Figure 298. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization."Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 363/399 . East ADM2: yellow (pending) the ADM2 is isolated "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 364/399 . Figure 299. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN) ED 01 SC."Request Node Ring" East ADM1: red (served) the West ADM1 switching is applied for SF "Request Node Ring" West ADM3: red (served) the East ADM3 switching is applied for the force command "Request Node Ring" West ADM2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 365/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. The lockout command has a higher with respect to the automatic protection switching and then only the lockout command has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Lockout Ring" commands East ADM1: red "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a lockout working command (reference point-SS-SN).ADM4: red All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3 . Figure 300." commands West ADM3: red "Prot.East ADM2: red (lockout protections served) "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 366/399 . The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active": green "Lockout Prot. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN) The lockout protection has a higher priority with respect to the automatic ring protection. Unavailable" West ADM3 .West ADM2: yellow (automatic protection is pending) ED 01 SC. "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 367/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. delete and modify ATM/IP/ETH TTPs.2 where all the operation are explained. VC12 TTP. VC12 TTP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 368/399 . For the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet traffic configuration (for example creation of Hard/Soft cross connection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. PNNI configuration etc. as a matter of fact ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards does not crate TTPs when they are configured. 20. VC12 TTP. E1 TTP) d) TTPs cross–connection. VC4–4c TTP.2. All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.) refers to the relevant OPERATOR’ S HANDBOOK (ATM or PR_EA) where “ Specific Terminal”application is explained in details.1 ATM boards On the ATM 4X4 board can be configured up to 16 TPs (VC4 TTP. Select ISA Port Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. On the ATM 8X8 board (present only on 1660SM) can be configured up to 32 TPs (VC4– 4c TTP. VC3 TTP. For the TTPs creation refer to paragraph 20. VC3XV. e) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet traffic configuration with “ Specific Terminal”application 20. VC3 TTP. E1 TTP) with a maximum throughput of 1. Passing on and copying of this document.20 ISA Port Configuration 20. The operational sequence to follow to manage ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet cross–connection is: a) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board declaration (Equipment Set) b) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet IP Address Configuration (Called ISA board IP Address) c) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation (VC4XV.1 Introduction This Chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards creation in the Equipment view and the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet TTPs creation. VC4 TTP. s31 TTP. VC3 TTP. s31 TTP. The ATM/Ethernet/PR_EA board creation is performed when CT users sets an ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board and then configure the IP Address. VC4 TTP. s31 TTP. VC12XV.2 ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation In this paragraph will be explained how to create.2 Gbit/s. E1TTP) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. ED Figure 301.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 369/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. It is possible to see the ATM Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “ Navigate”button. “ delete”an existing one and “ change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM–1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. To close the dialog box click on the “ Close”push button. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ” Delete ”button. If the users want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank).”button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 370/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then in the “ Selected Ite m”section he can change the fields ” STM1 number”and ” STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ” Time Slot Sw. Passing on and copying of this document. then in the “ Selected Ite m”sections. each page is an ATM. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. When the users want to create a new ATM port he can select an empty row. he can fill the field ” Signal”choosing among the available options and push the”Create ”button. Figure 302. The user can “ create”a new port.All rights reserved. Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 303. Select ISA Port Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. SDH VC3.2 PR_EA boards On the PR_EA boards can be configured the following TPs: – PREA4ETH: up to 59 TPs (SDH VC4. SDH VC12) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 371/399 . SDH VC12) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Navigate to ATM port view (example) 20.2. SDH VC3. – PREA1GBE: up to 62 TPs (SDH VC4. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 372/399 . PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields) 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 304. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. The user can “ create”a new port. then in the “ Selected Ite m”sections. If the users want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row. Passing on and copying of this document. PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 373/399 .All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. each page is an ATM. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ” Delete”button. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports. It is possible to see the PR_EA Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “ Navigate”button. Figure 305. then in the “ Selected Ite m”section he can change the fields ” STM1 number”and ” STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ” Time Slot Sw. “ delete”an existing one and “ change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM–1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page.”button. When the users want to create a new PR_EA port he can select an empty row. To close the dialog box click on the “ Close”push button. he can fill the field ” Signal”choosing among the available options and push the “ Create”button. Select ISA Port Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. VC12 TTP. VC3 TTP. VC12 TTP. C12XV and VC3XV) on the port card (ETH–MB) and up 14 TPs (VC4 TTP. VC3 TTP.3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board On the FAST ETHERNET boards can be configured up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. MPLS port view example 20.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 374/399 . VC12XV and VC3XV) on the relevant access card (ETH–ATX).All rights reserved. Figure 306. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ETH–MB (initial empty fieds) 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 307.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 375/399 .All rights reserved. The user can “ create”a new port. button allows to change the state of the concatenated virtual VCs (example VC12XV or VC3XV) that could be “ Idle”or “ active” . before to push on ” Create”button it is also necessary to choose the Concatenation Level value. When the user want to create a new TPs he can select an empty row. then in the “ Selected Ite m”sections. ETH–MB (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank). The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. “ delete”an existing one and “ change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM–1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page.. after creation command new fields and a new button appear. Passing on and copying of this document.”button. If the user want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 376/399 . The Ctrl Path Act. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. then in the “ Selected Ite m”section he can change the fields ” STM1 number”and ” STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ” Time Slot Sw. he can fill the field ” Signal”choosing among the available options and push the”Create ”button. each page is an ATM. Note: in case of concatenated VC TP creation (example VC12XV or VC3XV). Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports. Figure 308. Click on Ctrl Path Act. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 309. ED 01 SC. Control Path activation window (example) It is possible to see the VCs created on the ETHERNET board as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “ Navigate”button. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ” Delete ”button. To close the dialog box click on the “ Close”push button.button a new window will be opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 377/399 . VC12 TTP.2. ETHERNET port view example 20.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 378/399 . ED 01 SC. Figure 310. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board Three architectures are possible to provide Gigabit Ethernet ports: [1] 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet board (ETH–MB)+GBIT Access (GETH–AG). [2] GIGABIT board (GETHMB) stand–alone. Passing on and copying of this document. s31 TTP. With this architecture can be configured up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on each board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s (for example it is possible to configure 1 port VC4XV with a max. E1 TTP Type) on the ETH–MB main board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s. VC3 TTP. With this architecture can be configured up to 2 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type concatenation level=1) on the GETH–AG access card and up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP.All rights reserved. concatenation level equal to 4 or as alternative 4 ports VC4XV with concatenation level equal to 1). Furthermore ES1-8FE and ES1-8FX support up to one vc4 termination (vc4TTP).1. [3] GIGABIT board (GETH–MB) + GBIT Access (GETH–AG). slot with a throughput of 622 Mbit/s).6. The Alcatel Reference ISA-ES NE can integrate: · Local Ethernet Interface __ 8 local Ethernet 10/100 BaseT interface.34. Passing on and copying of this document. for a total maximum backplane capacity of 155 Mbit/s.35. Of course this means that there is only one VC4XV with concatenation level =1 available for another port and no resources for the last two ports present on the board. ES1-8FE and ES1-8FX support up to 8 trunks between the SDH mapper and the L2 switch.35. VC3-nv [n=1. ED 01 SC. __ Remote Gigabit Ethernet interface mapped into a SDH VC4. VC3. according to OMSN DR1 meeting of December 2003. All rights reserved. the concatenation level per port can be from 1 to 7. For more details read the Gigabit Ethernet description reported in the Technical Handbook. for a total maximum backplane capacity of 155 Mbit/s. In order to support this architecture the GETH–MB board must be equipped in the “ enhanced”slot (25. Each vc3 goups can contains up to 2 vc3 (vc3Virtual) and each vc12 Group can contain up to 21 vc12 (vc12Virtual). VC12 nv[n=1. and it supports up to 8 FE interfaces. · Remote Ethernet interface __ Remote Ethernet 10/100 interface mapped into a single VC12.28. and it supports up to 8 100MB optical interfaces.e. 20. or up to 8 vc12 Groups (vc12Xvirtual). 2 kinds of Eth SFP modules long haul and short haul could be equippend on this board.16. in detail we can use up to 3 vc3 Groups (vc3Xvirtual).18.7.19).26. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.15.. ES1-8FE and ES1-8FX don’ t foresee any access cards.4.5 ES1-8FE boards ES1-8FE board is supported from R.2 Gbit/s. NOTE: Up to 2 vc3Virtual per vc3Xvirtual are considered enough for supporting 100Mbit.2 Gbit/s. ES1-8FX board is supported from R.2. 26.34.63].29.38) and GETH–AG access in the associated slot (respectively 3.37.3]. VC4. The Gigabit Ethernet TPs creation follows the same rules described for the 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet Board.38) where the throughput per board is 1. In 1662SMC are also available slot called “ enhanced”(25.The same rules above described are applicable to 1662SMC when the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in normal slot (i. or up to 3 vc3 terminations (vc3TTP). If the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in one of these slots it is possible to reach a max concatenation le vel equal to 7 per port.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 379/399 . or up to 63 vc12 terminations (vc12TTP).29.37.2.1.28.. With this architecture can be configured up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on the GETH–AG access card and up to 4 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type) on the GETH–MB main board taking into account tha t the maximum throughput for the “ couple”must not exceed 1. LCAS protocol is supported on these vc .2. ED Figure 311. Passing on and copying of this document. ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 380/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 381/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) 01 SC.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 312. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 382/399 . or up to 16 vc12 Groups (vc12Xvirtual) for a total maximum backplane capacity of 622 Mbit/s.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ES4-8FE supports up to 16 trunks between the SDH mapper and the L2 switch.2.6 ES4-8FE boards ES4-8FE board is supported from R. Passing on and copying of this document.2 and it supports up to 8 100MB optical interfaces ES4-8FE doesn’ t foresee any access cards. ED 01 SC. in detail we can use up to 12 vc3 Groups (vc3Xvirtual). Navigate to ETH port view (example) 20. Figure 313.All rights reserved. according to OMSN DR1 meeting of December 2003. ES4-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) ED 01 SC.Furthermore ES4-8FE supports up to 4 vc4 terminations (vc4TTP). for a total maximum backplane capacity of 622 Mbit/s. or up to 252 vc12 terminations (vc12TTP). Figure 314. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 383/399 . Each vc3 goups can contains up to 2 vc3 (vc3Virtual) and each vc12 Group can contain up to 50 vc12 (vc12Virtual). NOTE: Up to 2 vc3Virtual per vc3Xvirtual are considered enough for supporting 100Mbit. All rights reserved. or up to 12 vc3 terminations (vc3TTP). LCAS protocol is supported on these vc. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 384/399 . ED Figure 315.All rights reserved. ES4-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 316. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Navigate to ETH port view (example) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 385/399 .All rights reserved. The downloading operation consists in the establishment of session between the NE and a software server for the purpose of file transfer. Manage Software Packages within NEs. to update spare boards for substitution after troubleshooting. activating the downloaded Software Package or coming back to the previous condition.1 Generalities and descriptions The Craft Terminal provides a set of functions. Indeed the MIB can be saved to or restored from the mass storage of the Craft Terminal. which can be executed by an NE of a particular type. It consists in one or more Software Units 01 SC. A backup/restore can be also done on the MIB of the NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 386/399 ED . The same function is used during maintenance phase. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: • • • All rights reserved. In this way the NE can follow the product evolution with "in service" equipment. which allow software packages manipulation within NEs. Passing on and copying of this document. Software Download general principle 21.1 Naming Conventions The naming conventions used for Download Management are the following: • Software Package: Software Package stands for a piece of software.1. Initiate / Abort Software Package Download.21 Software Management 21. The software download general principle is represented in the following figure. Figure 317. Display Software Download Information. Actions can then be performed on the NE software version as update and activation operation. or roll back to the previous software version operation. 1A to 1.1A to a Higher Release.1X (intermediate package) and the second is from 1. In order to migrate from Release 1. Updating a 1662SMC with already installed software. • • Software Unit: A Software Unit is a part of a software package.1X ED 01 SC. this function enables a download process to be initiated and monitored by the operator. Each software package must have a descriptor file otherwise it would not be possible to interpret the content of the package. etc.. Follow the operative indications.and a Descriptor File.2 Software download operative sequence Two main different operative condition are defined for this Equipment: First installation of a 1662SMC The NE is received without the relevant software install. release. Descriptor File: A Descriptor File contains information about the software package it belongs to and lists the composing software units. Software Management Function: The Software management function offers information about all current software packages present in an NE.. Thus. A software package is identified by its name. once downloaded) a software package can be: .e.B. activated package. A software unit is also identified by its name. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. On the NE (i. The Software Download Server is only responsible for fulfilling the requests received from NEs and performing software package file transfer operations to the NE. The software download must be done As described in the SIBDL section of this Handbook. 21.2. release. 21. Indicators enable software management (running package.The active version: the software package currently running on the NE . Standby version: is a software version which has been downloaded on the NE but which is not in the active state. the download procedure requires Two steps. version and edition. The following software version states are available: • • Commit (active) version: the software version currently running on the NE.Software Download Manager function . It manages the NE software releases and initiates software download operations. Two main functions are involved in the software downloading: . or a data segment of a particular board within an NE.A standby version: a software package. which is neither the active version nor the boot version • All rights reserved.Software Download Server function The Software Download Manager function takes the downloading and management requests of the operator and sends them to the NE.).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 387/399 . version and edition. The first is from 1. which can be either executable code.1 Software Download upgrade N. Passing on and copying of this document. activate the previous software package (Revert--back operation) to come back to the previous condition and then try to repeat the procedure. Procedure a) Install from CD ROM the NE Software Package on the Personal Computer. ED 01 SC.4 for details). A message will indicate the completed download. following the same rule will be possible to install also the IP specific software. start supervision and NE login) c) Check the present status of the software on a selected NE.2. f) Activate the package as presented at para. Passing on and copying of this document. In the example that follows will be described the ATM specific software installation. as explained in the “ 1320CT Basic Operator Handbook” .1B. 1.2 NE Software package installation procedure The following procedure allows the NE software package installation. 21. g) Check that the activated package is in the “ Commit”status.20. e) Select the new software package in the server and triggers the download process. d) Open the Download menu.To the Higher Release (e.g. In order to update the following procedure is to be done as explained in the next steps: a) Install the CD ROM with the NE Software Package on the PC.1B1). According to the customer Requirement two types of installation are possible: [1] If only SDH software package installation is required follow the instruction from point a) to point e) and than download the software package SDH (example 662SMC 2.5 on page 333. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.x platform c) From Network Element Synthesis (NES) choose the Software Administration option of the Supervision --> File Administration menu. b) Run the 1320CT V. Download should not be performed in presence of unstable alarms All rights reserved. h) If problems are found with the new activated package.09) from the EML— USM (refer to paragraph 20. b) Open a session on Craft Terminal application (start-up of the application. [2] If SDH+” Specific Software”package installation is required follo w the instruction from point a ) to point o ).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 388/399 . 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 389/399 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Figure 319. Will be opened. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Software Package Administration view d) Select the <SDH/WDM> tag e) Press the < INSTALL> butto n to install the relevant software package In the window that opens select the directory where the NE software package file has been installed (Typically is Alcatel/usm/ect/swdw/<equipment name>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute. Software Administration menu After the selection Figure below. Figure 318. > tag h) Press the < INSTALL> button to install the ATM software package present on the ATM CD ROM In the window that opens select the directory where the ATM software package file has been installed (typically is /ect/swdw/<atm>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute . Figure 320.All rights reserved. SPEC. Passing on and copying of this document. SDH software package installation f) Insert the ATM CD ROM in the computer g) Select the <SERV.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 390/399 . ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ATM software package installation (example) i) Select the <SDH/WDM> tag j) Select the SDH software package base onto which ATM software package has to be merged k) Press <Create Enhanced> to launch the software merging process and create the SDH+ATM Software package The New Software package will be created. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 391/399 . ED 01 SC. Figure 321. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 392/399 .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 322. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) The originated “ Enhanced”software package has a new label as follows: OMSN name = is the SDH name + “ E”letter OMSN version = is the SDH version Example: Starting from SDH SWP 662SMC ver.wz l) Select the <OMSN> tag.08) n) Select the ATM software package (in the right view) (example ATM 1.wz will be created the OMSN SWP 662SMCE ver.3 Software Download Manager menu ED 01 SC. 3. Figure 324. Passing on and copying of this document.07) o) Press the <ADD> button All rights reserved.xy. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) It is now possible to download the enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) from the EML-USM (Refer to paragraph 20.xy. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.01. m) Select the previously created software package (example 662SMCE 3.4 for details). 21.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 393/399 . 3.Figure 323.1. The following menu is displayed: Figure 326.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 394/399 . Passing on and copying of this document. Equipment view To display the software download manager menu from the main view. select the NE on which you want to perform download operations.All the software download operations are carried out from the software download manager. Figure 325. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 Init download ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. Download menu 21. then select the Download pull down menu. In the next field the list of the packages is displayed: • • • Server: name of the server. All rights reserved. Otherwise only the units with different software version will be loaded. If you want stop the download. Select the Init download option from the Download cascading menu. which also enables you to possibly abort the current download. All these operations can be performed from the SW downloading dialogue box. Click on the OK push button to start the download. Click on Forced push button to set the forced download attribute: then all software units of the Descriptor file have to be downloaded. Package : name of the package. If you confirm the operation. you can confirm or cancel the download. Passing on and copying of this document. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens. Version: version number of package. You can monitor the download progress by means of the Software in Progress dialogue box. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 327. push on Apply filter(s) button. To use the filter and display the selection. The Software download initiate dialogue box is opened. After selecting the desired NE you must choose an available software package and then start the download process. click on the Cancel push button of the Software download initiate dialogue box to close it. The SW packages existing on the Craft Terminal are displayed. ED 01 SC. SW Downloading dialogue box example The following fields are available to search a specific package: • • Server filter: to enter the server name selected. Package filter : to enter the package name selected.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 395/399 . the SW Downloading dialogue box then disappears and the Software download in Progress dialogue box is displayed from which you can if necessary abort the software download.You can request the NE to start / abort a software download operation. The operator is able to get information about the software package of the NE at any moment. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the abort. The following dialogue box is opened. which is being downloaded.All rights reserved. select the Units info option from the Download pull down menu. the total of bytes.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 396/399 . Figure 328. ED 01 SC. Software download in progress (example) The Software download in Progress dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE and the SW package name. the current percentage and the current file. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Click on the Abort push button to abort the complete download transaction. even if no download operations have been performed previously. For this. Passing on and copying of this document. Click on the Close push button to close the SWDL Work in Progress dialogue box at the end of the software download.5 SW package Activation and Units information This item permits to activate the downloaded software package and to get information about the software of the various units of the equipment. 21. edition of the package.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 397/399 . The following fields are displayed: • • • • • • Software package: name. none/Force/Activate/Delete Current state = standby means the package is not active on the NE Current state = commit means the package is active on the NE Action = (none) means no action to do ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Service Specific Components: name. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) The SW Information dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE. release.) Operational state: enabled or disabled. Figure 329. edition of the Service Specific Components (example ATM. Passing on and copying of this document. Current state\Action: commit or stand -by and with the option button. and the respective package name and status of the committed and (if existing) the uncommitted software. Activation date: date and hour of the last activation Vendor: the supplier of the product. You can select one software package by clicking on the name. IP etc. release. version. version.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Cancel push button you close the SW Information dialogue box. Detail software package (example) Clicking on [-] symbol behind each software package all details disappear.. the following window is displayed: All rights reserved. When you click on Close the previous view is displayed In when you click on the: • • • OK push button you close dialogue box. The following window is displayed: ED 01 SC. Help push button you access to help on context.Action = activate serves to activate the selected SW package Action = force (item not operative) Select the Activate option of the "Current State\Action" field. Figure 330. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the Mib management option from the Download pull down menu. 21. button allows giving more information about a selected software package. (MIB is a data base pertaining the configuration of the equipment). Clicking on it.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 398/399 .6 Mib management This function allows to make a backup and/or a restore of the Mib. to activate the Software package The Sw units Det. Only one restore operation can be performed at the same time on a given NE.All rights reserved. Delete: this action allows deleting a backup of the NE database. To activate an already restored MIB you click on Activate push button. you click on Close push button. To save or load the Mib to/from an external disk follow the indication of the "Basic 1320CT Operator's Handbook" using the menu options of the Network Element Synthesis. To exit of the NE MIB management window. Three push buttons allow choosing the action with click on: • • • Backup: performs the backup on the CT of the Mib present on the NE. The only effect is to delete the selected backup version stored in a specific directory of the FT server. Only at this point it becomes operative on the NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. NE MIB management The following fields are displayed: • • Available backups on local server : gives the list of the backups available on the Craft Terminal. The NE is not involved in this action. Passing on and copying of this document. Backup name : to enter the new backup name. Restore: this function allows the managing system to restore the NE configuration database of the managed system.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 399/399 . END OF DOCUMENT ED 01 SC. Figure 331. 2 Operator Handbook All rights reserved.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 1/46 .2 NE Maintenance 01 ED 2004-12-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC. .....................................................................................................................................7 Subrack and Rack view alarms... L-42 SUBSTITUTION WITH P4S1N........................3 ON SITE TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................................................................6 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL ..................22 5..LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .................. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.......................6 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ............10 5.........................................................................31 5..............34 ATM MATRIX 4X4 UNIT REPLACEMENT.......28 5............4.....................................................9 Equipment View alarms...............2..............................................................................................................................................................33 6 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE .............................8 5..................................................................................................4...42 7........2 TERMINOLOGY.................8 5............. S-41.................... S-41N............................................2 Target audience..................................................4 1................................................................................................................................................. L-41...........................10 External Points alarms (Housekeeping) ......................8 Fans Subrack alarms view..4 1.............7 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) .............................12 5..............................4......................................................................4 All rights reserved.....................4.18 5............4..............4 1....8 5....................30 5.........................................1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions..................................................................................1 3...16 5......1 Acronyms and abbreviations..................4........................................................................................................................................................4 1......................................4 Alarm Surveillance (AS)...........41 SYNTH SUBSTITUTION WITH SYNTHN .4.................................................................. Passing on and copying of this document.....................4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 2/46 ...........................................................................................................................2 ED 01 SC...........................................................................1 Document scope...........................................................................................................................................2 TROUBLESHOOTING ORGANIZATION ...............3 COMPACT ADM UNIT REPLACEMENT .......1 7............................................ L-42N........................................ L -41N.............3 Alarm synthesis indication ... 2 3 4 5 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................2........................................5 Port View alarms ........2 6......2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) .....6 Board view alarms and states ..4...........................4......4.........................................25 5................34 6..7 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC.........................................................................................................15 5....................................................................................5 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................1.........................13 5.....39 IP MATRIX UNIT REPLACEMENT ...............46 7 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE ...1 6................4 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL.......42 P4S1..............................................................1...................5 2...........................................................................2 Glossary of terms ...1 INTRODUCTION .....................3 1 INTRODUCTION .....................4 1........4 1......................................................................................1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ...........1 4..............1 SCOPE................. .............................. Alarms colors and Severity association ................................... Example of PDH Board View alarms and status ............................................................ 16 Table 3................................. 43 Figure 22.. 19 Figure 7......... Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected ........... Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) ................................................ COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected)............................................................................................. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms ............................... General Flow-chart for on site troubleshooting.................. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions ...................................... 14 Figure 4..................................................................................... COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) ................. 11 Figure 2................. TABLES Table 1........... 15 Figure 5.............................. Alarm pull down menu ............ 25 Figure 10... 20 ED 01 SC......................................... Example of ATM Port View alarms................................ Fans subrack alarms view ............ Management States Control Panel...................................................................... Example of Subrack view alarms and status............... 18 Figure 6.................................................4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 3/46 ....... Example of Rack view alarm and status ............................................... 17 Table 4...................... 16 Table 2........................... Power supply alarm ..... 45 All rights reserved...... 29 Figure 13........... 33 Figure 17......... 41 Figure 21.......................... 37 Figure 18.......................................................... Example of External Points alarms and status ....... 40 Figure 20............................ Example of Equipment View alarms and status ... ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection ................................. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication.............. Alarm Synthesis indication .... ............... 17 Table 5.................. 23 Figure 8..... 24 Figure 9... 32 Figure 16......... Example of SDH Board View alarms and status ... 30 Figure 14.......................................................................... Alarm Surveillance information general description..... 12 Figure 3. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection .............................. 31 Figure 15....................................................................................... Alarm Surveillance ......... Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view) .................................. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected ................................. 27 Figure 11. Passing on and copying of this document...................................... 39 Figure 19.............................. 20 Table 6.............. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..............LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES FIGURES Figure 1............... 28 Figure 12... Transmission network level structure ..................................................... 1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand.1.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 4/46 . 1. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. ED 01 SC.1 Scope 1. Passing on and copying of this document.2.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements. All rights reserved. the menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual. configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily. using the Craft Terminal (CT). 1.1.1 INTRODUCTION 1. The different functionalities related to the equipment views.Introduction manual 1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Terminology 1.1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --.2. 1 Introduction The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps: • • • • All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting). Problems with Craft terminal (shut-down and restart of the PC). Passing on and copying of this document. Maintenance of the PC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 5/46 . Unit replacement with a spare. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION 2. refer to the constructor's documentation. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.1 Introduction With regard to maintenance PC. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 6/46 .3 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC 3. The same window is displayed pressing he keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously.4 Problems with Craft Terminal 4.1 Purpose of the procedure All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. This procedure describes the Shutdown and restarts the PC should the Craft Terminal Software Product not be working properly or not responding to the operator's commands. In order to shut down the PC execute the command: start>shut down A window (Windows NT Security user dialog) is displayed. Passing on and copying of this document. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 7/46 . Anyway this method does not deal with the following aspects (which are to be deduced in other ways): • • Faulty electronic alarm indication.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 8/46 .5 Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting) 5. T NOT URGENT (MINOR): remote alarms pertaining to the urgent.1 Purpose of the procedure Troubleshooting involves the detection.) The following interfaces are present to troubleshoot the equipment: • • • • Q3 interface for Telecommunication Management Network F interface for Craft Terminal (Local or Remote) Remote Alarm for Supervisory Center LEDs on the units of the NE Usually maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Remote Craft Terminal) to locate the faulty equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty path and then on site to physically solve the trouble. can remotely manage and troubleshooting a network composed of max 32 NEs included itself. Troubleshooting organization The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of some flow-charts and tables. TAND: remote alarms respectively due to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply DC voltages.: • • • T URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL). Remote craft terminal: the operator.2 All rights reserved. etc. 5. The Maintenance can be done: • • • • From a TMN network management center From a Remote Craft Terminal (RCT) management center From a station supervisory center On site TMN network management center: by means of the TMN the maintenance technician can see the alarms sent by each equipment of the managed network (see the relevant TMN handbooks). Passing on and copying of this document. This handbook is used. connected to a local NE. processing and detection circuits Faulty wiring (back-panel. reported hereinafter. INT: Remote alarm pertaining to the local (internal) alarm type When a second CONGI unit is used the follo wing remote alarms are added: ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. connectors. TOR. Station supervisory center: the maintenance technician refers to the Remote Alarms received from the equipment in a centralized office of the station i. location and correction of failures in the equipment and the replacement of the defective parts.e. not urgent alarm type. Type: active loopbacks. laser forced ON or OFF. The NE is provided with LEDs. This condition causes: • On the rack o The YELLOW LED to light up ED 01 SC. the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal and of rack LED indications and station buzzers. Attended). from the top to the bottom: • • • • • Red LED: detection of an urgent (MAJOR and CRITICAL) alarm Red LED: detection of a not urgent (MINOR) alarm Yellow LED: alarm condition ATTENDED Yellow LED: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.Not Urgent Indication) and relevant condition (Abnormal condition. which indicate: Units Alarms: Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor LED (green/red) on the front cover plate. internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced) When green. it is possible to locate the equipment in troubles and to detect the failure type and source.• • • • TORC. On site: the operator is on site in case: 1) The equipment is not managed by a TMN or by a Remote Craft terminal (RCT) 2) The equipment is not reachable by the remote manager (TMN or RCT) and is therefore isolated 3) Link problems are present 4) The trouble has been located and a substitution is necessary In case 1). TUP: remote alarm due to microprocessor fault in the COMPACT ADM unit LOSQ2: remote alarm due to loss of communication with Mediation Device. the alarm condition can be "attended" by pressing the relevant alarm storing push button on the COMPACT ADM unit . In case of urgent or not urgent alarm. TANC: remote alarms respectively due to the loss of +3. in service unit Centralized Equipment Alarms : All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the COMPACT ADM unit which will deliver centralized optical indications (by means of LEDs on its front cover plate). When red. Passing on and copying of this document. 3).3V generated by the on board converter in of one or both the CONGI units. Not operative. Not operative. Indicates synthesis of alarms not associated to others severities.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 9/46 . try to restore after ALS Yellow LED: detection of an indication (WARNING) alarm The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the alarm type (Urgent . Specifically. IND: Indeterminate alarm synthesis. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 2). This LED indicates: • • All rights reserved. Depending on the supervisory center organization. after having located the alarmed equipment. forcing the unit into service. 4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 10/46 . The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal. The aim of the flow-charts which follow and of the maintenance tables is to locate the faulty unit and to replace it with a spare as well as to locate a failure along the link. On site Troubleshooting The trouble-shooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flow-charts: • • Figure 1. The Craft Terminal is cord-connected to the relative connector on the COMPACT ADM unit front cover plate (F interface). 5. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact equipment configuration (see Equipment Configuration applications on the Craft Terminal).: Power supply alarm As indicated in the flow-charts the troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• The RED LED to go off On the front cover plate: o Yellow LED (ATTENDED) to light up o Red LEDs NOT URGENT (MINOR) and URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) to turn off (free to accept other alarms) o If both LEDs are on.3 All rights reserved. the Attend command should be given twice: one for attending the NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm and one for attending the URGENT (MAJOR) alarm. and of the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the NE. because the flashing condition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.: General flow-chart Figure 2. The flow-charts/tables should be also consulted when the unit LEDs flash. All rights reserved. General Flow -chart for on site troubleshooting 3AL 98168 ADAA 11/46 . ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 1. Passing on and copying of this document. The troubleshoot proceeds checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by means of the craft terminal. Figure 2.WARNING! Before removing CONGI unit from subrack. IF THE REMOTE ALARMS ARE NOT UTILIZED CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY. IF POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT PROCEDE WITH OUTPUT “ NO” . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. SHOULD IT HAVE FAILED THEN ALL THE UNIT’ S LEDS WILL BE OFF (FOLLOW OUTPUT “ YES”OF THE FLOW-CHART). Power supply alarm N. subsequently remove the station battery cable if necessary and then extract the CONGI unit. 5. depending on the level of the structure under observation.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal. ED 01 SC. All rights reserved.B. Navigation across the various level views is done from higher to lower levels. The information on the NE alarm will be mainly obtained by means of the craft terminal through the Alarm Surveillance data and the alarms/status indications presented in the various views.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 12/46 . switch-off the relevant Station Battery Fuse Breaker present at the top of the Rack or in the Station Distribution Frame. by double clicking on the objects (see instructions on "NE management" section). it is necessary to "force on" the ALS. it may be difficult to detect the link failed. following the indication of Para 1.8. WARNING: During this phase the operator has to pay attention when working with fibers and connectors. access the Alarm Surveillance to troubleshoot. ED 01 SC. To locate it.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the aid of the previously indicated tables.1. The interface alarms (or section alarms. The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level): • All rights reserved. b) In case of alarm presence. 1. Describes the meaning of these alarms/statuses and the relevant maintenance actions. Transmission bearer level.1.. f) These above said paragraphs describe general aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applications.). LOS. B2etc. Domain Alarm Synthesis and Management States Control Panel always present on the window (it resumes all the NE alarms).6 and Para 1. d) It is also possible to check alarm and status at Board view.9. thus enabling the optical power transmission on the opposite direction of the failed link. The ABNORMAL indication informs the operator of the ALS forced condition. Observe the active alarms on the Severity Alarm Synthesis. Passing on and copying of this document.1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The troubleshoot procedure with the Craft Terminal consists of the following steps: a) The alarms/status view organization for the equipment is shown in Figure 2.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 13/46 . Subrack view and Equipment view are also supplied following the indication of Para 1. 5. When the ALS is active. enable the ALS.4.1.4 describes this view. The sections can be either regenerator or multiplexer and utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame.The NE hierarchy is organized in the following order: NE > rack > subrack > board > port > TP. indicated in the tables) belong to this level (example: Line LOS. The ALS states are indicated in the port view. Para 1. Table 3.5. e) Eventual housekeeping alarms can be localized following the indications given in Para. This application gives the details of the detected alarms and helps for their localization. Troubleshooting with Automatic Laser Shutdown The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is used to protect the operator who is working with the optical fiber. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical level (Transmission media) and Transmission section level. c) It is possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE. g) The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Event log option of the Diagnosis pull down menu (see "NE management" section). After having completed the maintenance.1. The path can be either lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity of data transferring. Figure 3.• • All rights reserved. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 14/46 . the paths too have specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. Path level It concerns the data transfer between the access points and the path. The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 3. It constitutes the circuit level support. Passing on and copying of this document. An example of this level alarm is Tributary LOS. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. Transmission network level structure ED 01 SC. It superimposes the SDH function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH order-wire channel associated functions are required. where path level troubleshooting is required. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the circuit proper. The alarms listed in the cited tables. Circuit level. TU LOP). It does not depend on the service or on the type of Transmission media. belong to this level (example: TUAIS. A message under the mouse facility provides the alarm or status complete denomination. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) All rights reserved.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 15/46 . Thus requiring a rapid intervention to restore the regular working condition of the equipment. Figure 4.4. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. Passing on and copying of this document.5. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view) The critical (CRI) or major (MAJ) alarms indicate severe alarms that could have impact on the current traffic (interruption or degrade). Major (Urgent) Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate alarm trouble-shooting. The alarms CRI. presented in Table 3. 1.3 Alarm synthesis indication Alarms and Statuses synthesis are given in all the screens. MGR. 5. Tableau 2. The alarms SUP. The alarms EXTP. Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic CRI MAJ MIN WNG Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleShooting (typical: NE isolation). OS. COM. See detailed indication in the following Para. COM.4. 1. Warning alarm Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network. Alarm/Status Description Critical alarm Maintenance ED 01 SC. Table 1. MIN. WNG. NB1. LAC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. See detailed indication in the following Para. and NTP) are the summaries of particular types of alarms detected by the equipment. All these indications (except for SUP. TRNS are part of the Domain Alarms Synthesis area.7.1.4. MGR. 1. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. hence the specific cause of alarm is to be found as indicated in the following paragraphs: 1.5. See detailed indication in the following Para.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 16/46 . 1.1. See detailed indication in the following Para. Reports the colors of the Management States Control Panel when not in "normal" condition.6. Alarms colors and Severity association Alarm Color RED ORANGE YELLOW CYAN WHITE GREEN Severity CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR WARNING INDETERMINATE NO ALARM Table 2. Table 1. NB1.1. IND are part of the Severity Alarms Synthesis area. MAJ. presented in Table 4. Minor (Not urgent) Synthesis of alarms for which a delayed alarm troubleshooting can be defined. NTP and AC are part of the Management States Control Panel. LAC. NB1. OS.9. presented in Table 5. For the Domain Alarms Synthesis the color corresponds to the highest severity among the set of the active alarms for the relevant domain.1. EQP. NB1.1. according to the same rules of previous Tableau 1. Reports the association between the colors of the Alarms and their Severity . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. BROWN: NE is not under supervision. Mnemonic SUP COM Maintenance GREEN: NE is under supervision. Management States Control Panel. See detailed indication in the following Para. Local Access State GREEN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted). See unit detailed indication in the following Para.IND Indeterminate alarm Synthesis of alarms not associated to the previous Severities. Synchronization Synthesis of alarms of the Synchronization alarm domain.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 17/46 . Table 3. Transmission alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain. CYAN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the OS permission to manage the NE (denied). Passing on and copying of this document. See unit detailed indication in the following Para. Used in the OS. See unit detailed indication in the following Para. Equipment alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain. Not operative. Alarm/Status Description External Point (Housekeeping alarm) Maintenance Table 4. NE GREEN: Identifies the “ Enable”operational unreachable/unreacha state of the connection between NE and ble Craft Terminal (SDH service link up) RED: Identifies the “ Disable”operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link down) Description Supervision state ED 01 SC. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic All rights reserved. See detailed indication in the following Para. EXTP SYNC EQP TRNS Check the relevant station alarm associated to the Input housekeeping indication. Manager level GREEN: Indicates that the N. For this purpose select the Diagnosis pull down menu. With the Alarm pull down menu (see Figure 3. Figure 5.).E. Type: active loopbacks. access the Alarm Surveillance (AS) to troubleshoot. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. is managed by the 1353SH. In the synthesis list it is possible to filter the data to show with the detailed view. double clicking on the selected row of the sublist of Figure 6. CYAN: NTP protocol enabled and at least one NTP servers (main or spare) are reachable.E. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. is not managed by the 1354RM CYAN: Indicates that the N. Alarm pull down menu After the selection a list with a synthesis of the Alarm Surveillance is presented and immediately after also the detailed list of the Alarm Surveillance (see Figure 6.). forcing the unit into service. BROWN: NTP protocol disabled. It is possible to show all the NE Alarms or filter the alarms report.4. is not Isolation managed by the 1353SH CYAN: Indicates that the N.E.4 Alarm Surveillance (AS) • All rights reserved. laser forced ON or OFF. try to restore after ALS NB1: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various syntheses. CYAN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. only alarms of the Equipment domain). AC Abnormal Condition GREEN: normal operating condition.e.OS MGR Operational System GREEN: Indicates that the N.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 18/46 . for example displaying only the alarms of a specific domain (i. is not managed by the 1354RM Network Time Protocol GREEN: NTP protocol enabled and both NTP servers (main and spare) are unreachable.E. NTP In case of alarm presence. 5. if an alarm is still active. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. The same information is reported in the "Clearing Status" column. Alarm Surveillance Detailed information of each alarm is supplied. the whole row has the same color of its relevant "Perceived Severity". Passing on and copying of this document. For instance. The alarms scenario is indicated by the colors of the alarms and by the information displayed in the table. Figure 6. the color of the row is green (except the "Perceived Severity").4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 19/46 . else if it has been cleared.All rights reserved. . . Detailed description of this application is given in the AS Operator's Handbook.Event Type Indicates the family type of the alarm as subdivided in the ASAP list.Probable Cause The fault/problem is indicated. They are available for the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector. time . and TP in which the alarm is detected. COMMUNICATION. . port.Event date and Indicates year. day and hour of the alarm.Friendly Name Identify the rack. WARNING .Correlated Not used notification flag . subrack.: / r01sr1sl09/#port01-CE1S .: EQUIPMENT. Supply general indications of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applications.: MAJOR. If cleared it has a green background. . . i.e.Perceived Severity The severity assigned to the alarm is indicated. i.: loss of signal. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.. starting from the left column: Table 5.e. MINOR. PROBABLE CAUSE NAME AND/OR ACRONYM OF DISPLAYED ALARM Loss of signal (LOS) Check line Transmitter Signal (TF) Replace unit Transmitter degraded (TD) ED MAINTENANCE Replace unit when possible (laser degrade) 01 SC.Clearing status Indicates if the alarm condition is terminated (CLR) or is still active (NCLR). Passing on and copying of this document.Acknowledge Indicates if the alarm has been acknowledge (ACK) with status the button on the COMPACT ADM unit or not (NACK). board.e. External Points alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. transmitter degraded. replaceable unit missing. month. Table 6.. Alarm Surveillance information general description TITLE DESCRIPTION . The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected.In the following are shortly described the main information obtained in the AS view.Repetition counter Not used The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operation.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 20/46 . i. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions All rights reserved. with the relevant color.e. i. . Table 6.Reservation Status Indicates if the alarm is reserved (RSV) or not (NRSV) according security management. resource isolation. Path Trace Mismatch AUXP Remote Node Transmission error (RNTE) Unit missing (RUM) Unit Problem (RUP) Unit type mismatch (RUTM) Version mismatch (VM) Cooling Fans Failure (CFF) Power Problem (POP) LAN problem (LAN) Check path / line section interested to the indication.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 21/46 . If persists substitute Compact ADM unit Insert the board Frequency offset (DRIFT) Loss of timing source (LOSS) Resource Isolation Communication Subsystem Isolation (CSF) Unequipped (U) Referred to Signal Label Unconfigured Equipment Present (UEP) Internal Communication Problem URU .Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis CPE-Communication protocol error LOMF . Check line (alignment problems due to line error) Check connected equipment Check line (excessive line BER) Check line (line signal degrade) Check line Configuration error Check far-end equipment Check the entire TU path.Loss of frame (LOF) AIS Excessive BER (EBER) Degraded Signal (DS) Loss of Pointer (LOP) Payload Mismatch (PLM) Far End Received Failure (FERF) Server Signal Failure (SSF) All rights reserved. Alarm indicates AIS signal received on the TU Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check connection between NE and Craft Terminal Check Communication configuration (LAPD) Configuration error Unit inserted but not declared Reset NE. Passing on and copying of this document. Check MSP protocol (architecture type.Loss Of MultiFrame PTM. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. switch fail) Check payload structure Not operative in current release Check far-end equipment Check far-end equipment Board alarms Insert missing unit Replace unit Insert right unit (unit inserted into a slot set with another type of unit) Update software version by means of download Check the fan units and substitute the faulty one Substitute the board Check LAN interconnection or substitute CONGI unit ED 01 SC.Underlying Resource Unavailable PM_AS. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command. Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created).State of the connection for Ethernet port (available only if an Ethernet port has been selected) A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located. Figure 7. Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). All rights reserved.MSP protection (if enable) . The non-alarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color and a "-" sign in the box. If the condition persists it is due to a unit hardware failure: in this case it will activate the RUP alarm 5. Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. Where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 22/46 . Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created).Automatic Laser Shutdown state . which will be restored.Internal communication problem (ICP) Internal dialogue problem in the SYNTH unit. are listed in Table 7. ED 01 SC. To Figure 9 is an example of a Port view. In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated. in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object.4. Passing on and copying of this document. The information regarding ALS states and Laser state useful for operators safety purpose are reported in the following: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. On the port view the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about: . The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP) and an "X" signs in the box. It indicates a temporary condition. For each TP of the Port a detail of the relevant alarms is presented. The alarms. following the indication of the Port View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook.5 Port View alarms It is also possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE. Active = The ALS has been activated (On). which can be found in the Port view. Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 7.All rights reserved.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 23/46 . Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 24/46 . ED Figure 8. Passing on and copying of this document. Example of ATM Port View alarms 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. to indicate whether the port is alarmed. Figure 9.4 : NE MAINTENANCE ED 01 3AL 98168 ADAA 25/46 . SC. The alarm and status indications depend on the unit type.All rights reserved. for example SDH units is organized on two levels of presentation (in the first is selected one of the available ports) and each view contains dedicated indications. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. An alarm box is displayed on each port. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms 5. following the indication of the Board View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook.4.6 Board view alarms and states The alarm and status indications at Board level can be obtained. Passing on and copying of this document. In the view is present the Administrative State information: "in service" or "out of service". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located. The alarms of the board are reported at the bottom of the "message/status area". An indication in the "message/status area" provides information about the board Administrative State: "in-service" or "out-of-service". In the view can also be present EPS indications.. by means of various boxes containing relevant acronyms.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 26/46 . The non-alarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color. where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. ED 01 SC. are listed in Table 7. in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. Passing on and copying of this document. which can be found in the Board view. The alarms. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP).All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Example of SDH Board View alarms and status 3AL 98168 ADAA 27/46 .4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 10.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. (Administrative State information). to indicate whether the board is alarmed.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms The alarms and status indications at subrack and rack level can be obtained. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status 5. An alarm box is displayed on each board. ED 01 SC. the lack of this symbol indicates its "out-of-service" state. Else. A "lock" symbol on a board indicates that it is "in-service".4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 28/46 .All rights reserved. A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located. Passing on and copying of this document. following the indications given o n the previous Section of this Handbook ("NE management"). This board alarm summarization is activated when one of the board alarms (those reported at the bottom of the Board view) is active. Figure 11. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Example of Subrack view alarms and status 3AL 98168 ADAA 29/46 .4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 12. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. check also the configuration in the Equipment menu.All rights reserved. Example of Rack view alarm and status 5. • • Battery Failure (BF): check that the station battery cables are right connected Cabling Problem (CAP): check that the alarms cable between the Fans Subrack and the CONGI unit is right connected. Figure 13.8 Fans Subrack alarms view To obtain Fan Subrack alarms indications click twice with the mouse on the relevant subrack drawing in the rack level view. (Connected FAN to CONGI#10 or connected FAN to CONGI#12) ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 30/46 . Passing on and copying of this document. • Temperature Out Of Range (TOOR): verify the Fan unit alarm and in presence of faulty substitute the relevant unit. clean also the Dust filter if necessary.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 31/46 .4. All rights reserved. Fans subrack alarms view 5. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. following the indication of the Equipment View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. ED 01 SC. Figure 14. Passing on and copying of this document.9 Equipment View alarms The alarm indications at Equipment level can be obtained. • • • • Fuse Failure (FF): Substitute the fuse in the CONGI unit and search for a cause AND Battery Failure (ABF): Failure of the Service Power Supply connected to the CONGI Rack connector. Backplane Failure (BKF): Substitute the Termination BUS Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SDH): Indicate the presence of link failure between the MATRIX and one of the units; for details choose the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. These alarms can be observed at OS level. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 15. Example of Equipment View alarms and status ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 32/46 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 5.4.10 External Points alarms (Housekeeping) The alarms and status indications relevant to External Points (housekeeping) can be obtained, following the indication of the External Points chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. The external state represents the alarm state. "On" when the alarm is raised, else "Off". If the external point is active (On), a red flag is represented near the state of the concerned point. In case of input point the alarm state is reported also in the user label column, by the box near its name: Green color and sign "-" ---> means non-alarmed condition. The change of color, as assigned by the severity (ASAP) ---> means alarmed condition. Figure 16. Example of External Points alarms and status ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 33/46 6 Unit replacement with a spare No particular indication is given as to spare handling, which is left to the Maintenance Administration. The replacement procedures are executed as follows: - Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace. Settings are specified in the MS documents. Here a layout figure indicates the exact location of all the setting arrangements a nd a table relates the operations to achieve with the settings. The cited documents are enclosed in the Technical Handbook. - Simply replace those units not provided with any software settings - With regard to the COMPACT ADM (also called SYNTH or SYNTHN) unit refer to paragraph 6.. - With regard to the ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit refer to paragraph 6.2. - With regard to the IP MATRIX unit refer to paragraph 6.3. - When upgrading equipment with “ New Hardware”(for example SYNTHN unit) that substitutes the old units (for example SYNTH unit), follow the indication given in paragraph 7. WARNING: In order to avoid short Circuit, before substituting the CONGI unit, Switch--off the relevant Station battery fuse breaker. Subsequently remove the Station Battery cable and extract the CONGI unit. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. WARNING: before inserting the new spare unit carefully checks the integrity of the relative connectors. Don’ t insert the units that have been damaged during the transport/storing or in a phase before their replacing. 6.1 COMPACT ADM unit replacement N.B. In this paragraph for COMPACT ADM is generically intended one of the following unit: - SYNTH16 - SYNTH16N Various procedures are utilized to replace a COMPACT ADM faulty unit. They depend on the following maintenance conditions: - EPS protection of the COMPACT ADM unit • EPS present or not (typically present) • Failure on the Main board • Failure on the Spare board - Type of spares available: • Spare without software installed. This is the normal condition. • Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit to replace. • Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from the one of the unit to replace, or belonging to other types of equipment or unknown. - CONGI unit version (read NOTES in Figure 17. and Figure 18.) - MIB store in the Craft Terminal or O.S. SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE ED 01 3AL 98168 ADAA 34/46 The flow charts of Figure 17. And Figure 18. Illustrates the procedures to follow For the COMPACT ADM substitution. The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults; when not possible this is indicated in the flow chart. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Replacement problems: When replacing the COMPACT ADM unit the traffic of the two SDH ports is lost when not SNCP protected. Then it is suggested to replace in low traffic condition. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 35/46 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 36/46 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 17. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 37/46 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 38/46 Figure 18. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected) 6.2 Two ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. different procedures are available for ATM MATRIX 4X4 substitution according to the EPS schema. The flow-charts of Figure 19. Illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is not EPS protected. The flow-charts of Figure 20. Illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is EPS protected. The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 39/46 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 19. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection 3AL 98168 ADAA 40/46 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 20. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection 6.3 IP MATRIX unit replacement For IP MATRIX unit replacement refer to the specific Operator’ s Handbook. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 41/46 follow the instruction described in Figure 21. Passing on and copying of this document.7 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE In the next paragraphs is indicated the procedure to follow when upgrading an equipment with “ New Hardware” . All rights reserved. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear ED 01 SC.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 7. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 6 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from the list then click on ok. This procedure permits. to maintain the system “ in service” . if the equipment is EPS protected and inserted in a protected network (linear or ring protection). At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. SYNTH without “ N”is the old version). The new Hardware is identifying by the “ N”letter at the end of the acronym unit (for example SYNTHN is the new version.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 42/46 .1 SYNTH substitution with SYNTHN According to the EPS and SNCP SYNTH protection scheme different procedure are available: [1] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected Substituting the old SYNTH all the traffic is lost! • • • • • Remove the old SYNTH in slot 6 from the subrack Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 6 . their traffic will be lost during the substitution. Passing on and copying of this document. • Remove first the old SYNTH in slot 1 5 from the subrack ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 43/46 .All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the traffic of all the other board will not be lost. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected [2] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected Supposing that the STM-16 ports are not network protected. Figure 21. follow the instruction described in Figure 22. For details see the paragraph “ Switching EPS”in the “ NE MANAGEMENT”section of this Handbook. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 1 5 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH acronym from the list then click on ok.• • • • • • • • • • All rights reserved..4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 44/46 . On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 6 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear ED 01 SC. Insert the new SYNTHN into the subrack slot 1 5 . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Remove the old SYNTH in slot 6 from the subrack Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 6 . At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear Force the EPS Switching on SYNTHN in slot 1 5 by selecting the Switch option from the EPS menu. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 45/46 . Figure 22.All rights reserved. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected [3] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected with STM-N ports SNCP protected ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. S-41N. L-41N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. But without traffic interruption on the STM-16 ports present on the SYNTH because SNCP protected. In the following an example will be given substituting a P4S1 with a P4S1N. • On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted • Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the acronym of the new unit (in our example P4S1N) from the list. L-42 substitution with P4S1N.The procedure is the same of that described on point [2]. L-42 units respectively with S-41N. END OF DOCUMENT ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98168 ADAA 46/46 . • Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear All rights reserved. on Craft Te rminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present.2 P4S1. L -42N units. Passing on and copying of this document. L-41N. the same procedure can be applied to substitute the S-41. L-41. L-42N During the substitution the traffic carried by the units will be lost if not SNCP protected. S-41. then click on ok. L -41. 7. • Remove the old unit (example P4S1) from the subrack • Insert the new unit (example P4S1N) into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old unit. 5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 1/16 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.2 Download and SIBDL Configuration 01 ED 2004-12-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC.2 Operator Handbook All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. 1 SIBDL download procedure .................................................2.............1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ..............2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment........ 12 ED 01 SC.............5 2........................................................................................... 11 3.........1.......................................................... 2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL .........1............................................................................................2 Glossary of terms......................5 2..............................1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment)........................................................LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .............................4 1.................................................3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment .......... 11 3.......................................................................................................................................4 1..............1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ...........3 1 INTRODUCTION .1 Acronyms and abbreviations ......................1......................4 1.......................................................................................4 1.2 TERMINOLOGY .................................................................... 11 3.........................................1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................5 3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL ............4 All rights reserved..............................................................................................4 1..................1..................2................................. 11 3......................................1.......................................5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 2/16 ..........1............................................ Passing on and copying of this document.....................1 Document scope............................................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...........................4 1......2 Target audience............ ..................... SIBDL download procedure .......5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 3/16 .....7 Figure 3........ SIBDL download procedure .....9 Figure 7...... Serial Cable Modem configuration ..... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.step 4 ................ SIBDL download procedure ..................................................................... Serial Cable Modem configuration ....step 4 ... 14 Figure 10...............................step 6 ............................... SIBDL download procedure ...................8 Figure 5......step 3 ........ 10 Figure 8................. Serial Cable Modem configuration ..................... ED 01 SC.............................................................................................................9 Figure 6......................... SIBDL download procedure .....................step 7 ............................... SIBDL download procedure ....... Serial Cable Modem configuration ....................................... 15 Figure 12..step 5 ....................step 1 ........................................step 1 ............step 2 ....step 3 ...... 16 All rights reserved........step 5 ............... Passing on and copying of this document............ 14 Figure 11........................6 Figure 2.......................................................... 12 Figure 9................... SIBDL download procedure . Serial Cable Modem configuration .........................................................8 Figure 4.................................................step 2 ....................................LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES Figure 1... The documents that should be read before starting this document are: • 1320CT Rel.1 Scope 1.2 Target audience The SIBDL Manual is intended for all users. Download with SIBDL.1.2 1. Configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation are described. 1.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 4/16 .2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual. used to download the NE software via Q or F interface.1 Basic Operator's Handbook Terminology 1.1 INTRODUCTION 1. The SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download) procedure contains the following operative descriptions: • • All rights reserved. See Chapter on page Configuration for SIBDL. 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. Passing on and copying of this document.2. The complete procedure is indicated.1 Document scope The SIBDL Manual describes the SIB DL application. ED 01 SC.1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 1. • • Turn on phase. it should have configured.B. It must not be executed to download a spare unit that contains software. Passing on and copying of this document. Serial Cable Modem refer in Para Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment N. In Windows 2000 environment. while the traffic is not lost. TEL NET Accessory. RAS (Remote Access Service) and Serial Cable Modem.2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL 2. presented in the previous section. Protocol Service.1 Purpose of the procedure This procedure describes how to download NE software with the SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download) program. when substituting the COMPACT ADM unit with a spare. when activating the NE. ATTENTION: Download with SIBDL program put the COMPACT ADM unit out of service regarding to the supervision and control function. Protocol Service. and the spare one don’ t contain software. before to use SIBDL: • • TCP/IP protocol. TEL NET Accessory.1.1 SIBDL download procedure Download with SIBDL program is performed in the following phases: All rights reserved. RAS (Remote Access Service) is not necessary in Windows 2000 environment To download with SIBDL execute the following steps: 1) Connect the Craft Terminal with the NE: ED 01 SC. WARNING: In Windows NT environment.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 5/16 . in this case use the Download option of the EML-USM. When using the Q interface the time necessary to the operation is reduced to some minute. SIBDL tool permits to download the software towards the NE using the Q interface (Ethernet connection) or the F interface RS232 (serial line) of the NE. Maintenance phase. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. defined by the NT Administrator. it should have configured. defined by the NT Administrator. before to use SIBDL: • • TCP/IP protocol. 2. step 1 4) In the field "source file" at the bottom write the path name of the NE descriptor file (see Figure 2. Passing on and copying of this document.3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.1b. 2. select the file descriptor in the directory 1662SMC(example:/ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.) with the command menu. select the file descriptor in the directory 1662SMC (example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.). 2) Start SIBDL. Create the NE software package as explained in the paragraph "NE Software package installation procedure" NE MANAGEMENT of this Manual. Figure 1.05/FTservices/data/1662SMC/2. connect only the F interface. If the software to download manage the SDH+ATM/IP functionality.• • When download by means of Q interface. always connect both the F and Q interface.dsc) 3.05/FTservices/data/1662SMC/2. The path name has typically the following format (see the example in the figure): <Directory>/<NE name and release number>/<file descriptor> Note: In current release it is possible to download two types of file descriptor according to the following rules: 1. selecting Start > Program>Alcatel>SIBDL"version">SIBDL 3) In the screen.1b.dsc) ED 01 SC. SIBDL download procedure . select "automatic mode" commands typing 8 and then ENTER.3. When download by means of F interface.09/1662.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 6/16 . If the software to download manage only the SDH functionality.09/ 1662. which appears (see Figure 1. write the IP Address of the Craft Terminal • Second possibility: write the IP Address of the NE and press ENTER ED 01 SC. which appears.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 7/16 . SIBDL download procedure . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.step 2 5) Press ENTER 6) This step (see Figure 3.With F interface: write PPP and press ENTER . Passing on and copying of this document. In the field "NE_IP_address [PPP TEL NET]" at the bottom: .All rights reserved. Figure 2.) asks for the "IP Address" insertion.With Q interface: • First possibility: write TELNET and press ENTER In next step. step 4 ED 01 SC.) Figure 4. as result of this action the program ask for a confirmation (see Figure 5. SIBDL download procedure .step 3 7) This step (see Figure 4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 3.All rights reserved.) asks if the flash card must be formatted.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 8/16 . Type " y" to format the flash card. SIBDL download procedure . Figure 5.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 9/16 . SIBDL download procedure .step 6 9) Press ENTER. The screen shows the automatic download evolution with a final message indicating the completed download (see Figure 6.).) and ENTER. Figure 6.All rights reserved. SIBDL download procedure . ED 01 SC.step 5 8) Type " y” . On the contrary repeat the procedure. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. 10) In the presented screen type 4 (see Figure 7. Select Unit info from Download menu .Press OK to complete the operation In this condition the download is executed immediately. Figure 7.Select Init download from Download menu .Select the SW package to Download and click on OK button In this condition the download is executed immediately . If RUTM alarm is present means the board type inserted in t he subrack (typically MATRIXN in this release) and the board type software configured (typically MATRIX) is not the same. ED 01 SC. SIBDL download procedure . 12) Extract and re-insert again the EQUICO unit to complete the operation 13) Run the 1320CT application.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.Select the Software Package loaded as explained above and activate it . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. execute Start supervision and NE login 14) From Craft Terminal (EML-USM view) execute the normal download procedure: N.B. under this condition the user must cha nge the board type with the Equipment>Set menu.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 10/16 .step 7 11) Extract and re-insert the EQUICO unit to complete the operation. . Check that no RUTM alarm is present in the slot reserved to the main MATRIXN. 1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment) To install a new modem.1 Purpose of the procedure This chapter describes the configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then execute: All rights reserved. the user should have administrator privileges and need the installation CD-ROM of Windows NT.5: SIBDL ED 3AL 98168 ADAA 11/16 .. Push the button "Have disk. Select Remote Access Service (RAS) in the dialog box. Search the folder where SIBDL is installed (Alcatel / SIBDL "version" / SIBDL /) and select the file "mdmalca. • • • • • Double click on "My computer" icon on the PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon. the user should have administrator privileges. Select the folder "Services" in the "Network" window. Put a tick against "Don't detect my modem. Push the button "Browse. • • Follow the instructions. Follow the instructions.. Push the button "OK" in "Add RAS Device" window.e. Double click on "Network" icon.. after push the button "Open"..inf". Push the button "Install Modem" in "Add RAS Device" window: start the "Install New Modem" window. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the folder "Services" in the "Network" window and push the button "Add": start the "Select Network Service" window. I will select him from a list" and push the "Next > " button. • • • • • • Select "Remote Access Service" and push button "Properties.” Push the button "add" in "Remote Access Setup" window. Put a tick against "Selected ports" and select only one port (the port must be available. • Push the button "OK" in window "Install from disk".. then execute: • • Double click on "My computer" icon on the PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment To install a new modem. 01 SC. i. 3.1.. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button "Next >". Double click on "Network" icon. 3.”start the window Install from disk.1. Select the modem named "Serial cable" in the dialog box of window "Install New Modem" and push the button "Next >".3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL 3. I will select it from a list" and push the button "Next >"...”the window "Install from disk" will appear.step 1 • • • Push the button "Have disk. Double click on "My computer" icon on your PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon. Push the button "OK" in "Network" window...3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment To install a new modem. Push the button "Add": "Add/Remove Hardware Wizard: Install New Modem" window will appear." Search the folder where SIBDL is installed and select the file "mdmalca. 01 SC. Serial Cable Modem configuration . you should have administrator privileges. Push the button "Browse.1.inf".5: SIBDL ED 3AL 98168 ADAA 12/16 . after push the button "Open". Passing on and copying of this document. 3. Figure 8. Double click on "Phone and Modem Options" icon and select the "Modems" folder.• • Push the button "Continue" in "Remote Access Setup" window. • • • • All rights reserved. Put a tick against "Don't detect my modem. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.• • Push the button "OK" on the "Install from disk" window. Select the modem named "Serial cable" into dialog box from "Install New Modem" window and push the button "Next >". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 13/16 . ED 01 SC. step 3 • The window "Digital Signature Not found" will appear: push the button "Yes".5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 14/16 . Serial Cable Modem configuration . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.Figure 9.step 2 • Put a tick against "Selected ports" and select only one port (the serial port must be available.e. Serial Cable Modem configuration . Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 10. i. All rights reserved. and after the button "Finish" to end modem installation. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button "Next >". All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.step 4 • At the end. Serial Cable Modem configuration .5: SIBDL 3AL 98168 ADAA 15/16 . Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 11. the "Phone and Modem Options" window will display the installed modem ED 01 SC. step 5 01 SC.All rights reserved. Serial Cable Modem configuration .5: SIBDL END OF DOCUMENT 3AL 98168 ADAA 16/16 . ED Figure 12. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.